POL00413475
POL00413475
ae
HM Treasury
Managing Public Money
May 2021
POL-BSFF-0233694
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0001
POL00413475
POL00413475
I ae
HM Treasury
Managing Public Money
May 2021
POL-BSFF-0233694_0002
POL00413475
POL00413475
© Crown copyright 2021
This publication is licensed under the terms of the Open Government Licence v3.0 except
where otherwise stated. To view this licence, visit nationalarchives.gov.uk/doc/open-
government-licence/version/3.
Where we have identified any third party copyright information you will need to obtain
permission from the copyright holders concerned.
This publication is available at: www.gov.ub/official-documents.
Any enquiries regarding this publication should be sent to us at
public.enquiries¢
ISBN: 978 1 911680 83 3
PU: 3121
POL-BSFF-0233694_0003
Contents
Foreword
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Annex 1.1
Annex 2.1
Annex 2.2
Annex 2.3
Annex 2.4
Annex 3.1
Annex 4.1
Annex 4.2
Annex 4.3
Annex 4.4
Annex 4.5
Annex 4.6
Annex 4.7
Annex 4.8
Annex 4.9
Annex 4.10
Responsibilities
Use of Public Funds
Accounting Officers
Governance and Management
Funding
Fees, charges and levies
Working with others
The Comptroller and Auditor General
Treasury approval of legislation
Delegated authorities
PAC Concordat of 1932
New Services
The Governance Statement
Finance Directors
Use of models
Risk
Insurance
Senior Responsible Owner Accountability
Procurement
Subsidies
Expenditure and payments
Fraud
Losses and write offs
13
20
31
38
44
55
57
60
64
66
70
74
77
79
84
90
92
97
98
101
104
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0004
Annex 4.11
Annex 4.12
Annex 4.13
Annex 4.14
Annex 4.15
Annex 5.1
Annex 5.2
Annex 5.3
Annex 5.4
Annex 5.5
Annex 5.6
Annex 6.1
Annex 6.2
Annex 6.3
Annex 7.1
Annex 7.2
Annex 7.3
Annex 7.4
Glossary
Overpayments
Gifts
Special payments
Remedy
Asset management
Grants
Protecting the Exchequer interest (clawback)
Treatment of income and receipts
Contingent liabilities
Lending
Banking and managing cash
How to calculate charges
Charging for information
Competition Law
Forming and reforming ALBs
Framework documents
Government Companies, Public Corporations
and Trading Funds
Using private finance
POL00413475
POL00413475
110
115
118
123
127
131
135
139
142
150
156
164
171
174
177
181
184
189
191
POL-BSFF-0233694_0005
Foreword
about this document
This document updates the version published in 2007. Like the original,
it sets out the main principles for dealing with resources in UK public
sector organisations Some of the specifics, especially those in the
annexes, relate to England rather than the devolved administrations,
which have their own detailed rulebooks. But the same basic principles
generally apply in all parts of the UK public sector, with adjustments for
context.
The key themes also remain. They are the fiduciary duties of those
handling public resources to work to high standards of probity; and the
need for the public sector to work in harmony with parliament.
While these principles are invariant, the advice in this document cannot
stand forever. The law, business practices, and public expectations all
change. So public sector organisations can and should innovate in
carrying out their responsibilities, using new technology and adopting
good business practice. Throughout parliament always expects the
government and its public servants to meet the ethical standards in this
document and to operate transparently.
As before, the main text of the document is intended to be timeless. The
Treasury will revise the annexes from time to time as the need arises. All
the text is available freely on the gov.uk website.
Above all, nothing in this document should discourage the application of
sheer common sense.
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0006
POL00413475
POL00413475
Chapter 1
Responsibilities
The relationship between the government, acting on behalf of the Crown, and parliament,
representing the public, is central to how public resources are managed. Ministers implement
government policies, and deliver public services, through public servants; but are able to do so only
where parliament grants the right to raise, commit and spend resources. It falls to the Treasury to
respect and secure the rights of both government and parliament in this process.
1.1 Managing public money: principles
1.1.1 The principles for managing public resources run through many diverse
organisations delivering public services in the UK. The requirements for the different
kinds of body reflect their duties, responsibilities and public expectations. The
demanding standards expected of public services are set out in box 1.1.
Box 1.1; standards expected of all public services
honesty impartiality openness accountability accuracy
fairness integrity transparency _ objectivity reliability
carried out
in the spirit of, as well as to the letter of, the law
in the public interest
to high ethical standards
achieving value for money
1.1.2 The principles in this handbook complement the guidance on good
governance in the Corporate Governance Code'applying to central government
departments. Some of the detail applies to England only, or just to departments of
state. There is separate guidance for the devolved administrations. Where
restrictions apply, they are identified.
1.1.3 Much of this document is about meeting the expectations of parliament.
These disciplines also deliver accountability to the general public, on whose behalf
parliament operates. The methods of delivery used should evolve as technology
permits. Public services should carry on their businesses and account for their
1 The Corporate Governance Code — see httpsy/www.gov.uk/government/oublications/corporate-governance-code-for-central-
government-departments
POL-BSFF-0233694_0007
stewardship of public resources in ways appropriate to their duties and context and
conducive to efficiency.
1.2 Ministers
1.2.1 In the absence of a written constitution, the powers used to deploy public
resources are a blend of common law, primary and secondary legislation,
parliamentary procedure, the duties of ministers, and other long-standing practices
This mix may of course change from time to time
1.2.2 As the Corporate Governance Code makes clear, the minister in charge of a
department is responsible for its policy and business as part of the broad sweep of
government policy determined in Cabinet. They:
* determines the policies of the departmental group;
* chairs the departmental board;
* allocates responsibilities among the ministers in the department;
* chooses which areas of business to delegate to officials, and on what
conditions;
* looks to the department's accounting officer (see chapter 3) to delegate
within the department to deliver the minister's decisions and to support
the minister in making policy decisions and handling public funds; and
* also has general oversight of other bodies on whose behalf they may
answer in parliament, including the department's arms length bodies
(ALBs)
1.2.3 The Ministerial Code? requires ministers to heed the advice of their accounting
officers about the proper conduct of public business. See section 3.4 for how the
minister may direct the accounting officer to proceed with a policy if a point of this
kind cannot be resolved
1.2.4 The minister in charge of a department may delegate defined areas of its
business, or of its parliamentary work, to their junior ministers. Ministers have wide
powers to make policies and to instruct officials.
1.2.5 Only ministers can propose legislation to parliament to raise public revenue
through taxation, or to use public funds to pursue their policy objectives. Specific
primary legislation is normally required to spend public funds (see section 2.1).
Similarly, taxes may be collected, and public funds may be drawn, only with
parliamentary authority; and only as parliament has authorised
1.2.6 It is not normally acceptable for a private sector organisation to be granted
powers to raise taxes, nor to distribute their proceeds. Parliament expects these
responsibilities to fall to ministers, using public sector organisations.
1.2.7 The House of Commons (and not the House of Lords) enjoys the financial
privilege to make decisions on these matters.
2 https: .gov. uk/government/publications/ministerial-code
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0008
1.3 Parliament
1.3.1 Parliament approves the legislation which empowers ministers to carry out
their policies. It also allows finance for services when it approves each year’s
Estimates. See the Estimates Manual? for more.
1.3.2 From time to time parliament may examine government activity. Select
committees examine policies, expenditure, administration and service delivery in
defined areas. The Committee of Public Accounts (PAC - see section 3.5) examines
financial accounts, scrutinises value for money and generally holds the government
and its public servants to account for the quality of their past administration.
1.4 The Treasury
1.4.1 Parliament looks to the Treasury to make sure that:
* departments use their powers only as it has intended; and
* revenue is raised, and the resources so raised spent, only within the
agreed limits.
1.4.2 Hence it falls to the Treasury to
* set the ground rules for the administration of public money; and
* account to parliament for doing so.
1.4.3 This document sets out how the Treasury seeks to meet these parliamentary
expectations. The key requirements are regularity, propriety, value for money and
feasibility (see box 3.2). The Treasury:
* — designs and runs the financial planning system4 and oversees the
operation of the agreed multiyear budgets to meet ministers’ fiscal
policy objectives;
* oversees the operation of the Estimates through which departments
obtain authority to spend year by year;
* sets the standards to which central government organisations publish
annual reports and accounts in the Financial Reporting Manual (FReM).
This adapts International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) to take
account of the public sector context;
* sets Accounts Directions for the different kinds of central government
organisations whose accounts are laid in parliament; and
* may also work through the Cabinet Office to set certain standards
applicable across central government, for example functional
standards5.
3 httos/www.gov.uk/government/publications/supply-estimates-quidance-manual
4 See the Consolidated Budgeting Guidance for more - httosy/www.gov.uk/government/oublications/consolidated-budgeting-
guidance
5 See Functional Standards - GOV.UK (www. gov.uk}
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0009
1.5 Departments
1.5.1 Within the standards expected by parliament, and subject to the overall
control and direction of their ministers, departments have considerable freedom
about how they organise, direct and manage the resources at their disposal. It is for
the accounting officer in each department, acting within ministers’ instructions, and
supported by their boards, to control and account for the department's business
1.5.2 A departmental board, chaired by the senior minister, leads each department.
Boards can bring to bear skills and experiences from elsewhere in, and outside of,
the public sector (see section 4.1)
1.5.3 Within each department, there should be adequate delegations, controls and
reporting arrangements to provide assurance to the board, the accounting officer®
and ultimately ministers about what is being achieved, to what standards and with
what effect. These arrangements should provide timely and prompt management
information to enable plans to be adjusted as necessary. Similarly ministers should
have enough evidence about the impact of their policies to decide whether to
continue, modify or end them. This is discussed further in chapter 4
1.5.4 In supporting ministers, civil servants should provide politically impartial
advice. Should they be asked to carry out duties which appear incompatible with
this obligation, the accounting officer should take the matter up with the minister
concerned (see also the Civil Service Code?)
1.5.5 Departments often operate with and through a variety of partners to deliver
their ministers’ policies. It is important that these relationships operate in the public
interest: see chapter 7.
1.6 The Comptroller and Auditor General
1.6.1 Supported by the National Audit Office (NAO), the Comptroller and Auditor
General (C&AG) operates independently to help parliament scrutinise how public
funds have been used in practice. Further information about the role of the NAO is
available on their website? and in annex 1.1
1.6.2 The C&AG provides parliament with two sorts of audit:
* financial audit of the accounts of departments and ALBs, covering:
— assurance that accounts have been properly prepared and are free
of material misstatements9; and
— confirmation that the underlying transactions have appropriate
parliamentary authority;
+ value for money reports assessing the economy, efficiency and
effectiveness with which public money has been deployed in selected
areas of public business. A programme of these reviews covers a variety
6 if there is a change of Accounting Officer in the course of the year, the Accounting Officer in place at the year end takes
responsibility for the whole year’s accounts, using assurances as necessary,
8 The NAO website address is httoy/Avww.nao.org.uk
9 See Audit Practice Note 10 of the Audit Practices Board on the FRC website at Httov/Avww.fre.org.uk
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0010
POL00413475
POL00413475
of subjects over a period, taking account of the risks to value for money
and parliament's interests.
1.6.3 The C&AG has a general right to inspect the books of a wide variety of public
organisations to further these investigations. When the NAO investigates any public
sector organisation, it should get full cooperation in provision of papers and other
oversight. It is good practice to draw the NAO’s attention to the confidentiality of
any sensitive documents provided in this process. It is then for the independent
C&AG to judge what material can be published in the public interest.
1.6.4 In addition, the C&AG publishes other independent reports to parliament. The
PAC (see section 3.5) may hold hearings to examine evidence on any of these
reports and on other related matters.
POL-BSFF-0233694_0011
POL00413475
POL00413475
Chapter 2
Use of Public Funds
This chapter explains the process for parliamentary authorisation of public resources. Parliament
consents in principle to the use of public funds through legislation to enable specified policies. It then
approves use of public resources to carry out those policies year by year by approving Estimates. Only
rarely can lesser authority suffice. At the close of each financial year, parliament expects a clear
account of the use of the public funds it has authorised. Parliament expects the Treasury to oversee
the operation of these controls. The PAC may investigate specific issues further.
* Ministers have very broad powers to control and direct their
departments. In general, they may do anything that legislation does not
prohibit or limit, including using common law powers to administer
their operations or continue business as usual.
+ Ministers also need parliamentary authority for use of public funds
before each year’s expenditure can take place. The full list of
requirements is set out in box 2.1.
Box 2.1: requirements for use of public funds
* budget cover in the collectively agreed multi-year budgets
+ with a few exceptions’, parliamentary authorisation for each year’s drawdown
of funds through an Estimate, which is then approved as a Supply and
Appropriation Act (see section 2.2)
* adequate Treasury consents (see section 2.3)
* assurance that the proposed expenditure is regular and proper (section 2.4)
+ sufficient specific legal powers - though see section 2.5 for some limited
exceptions
2.1.1 The Treasury runs the control process because parliament expects the Treasury
to control public expenditure as part of fiscal policy. The primary means through
which the Treasury controls public expenditure is multi-year budgets, agreed
collectively at spending reviews. The Consolidated Budgeting Guidance sets out the
rules for their use. (See also chapter 4).
1 See section 5.3
POL-BSFF-0233694_0012
POL00413475
POL00413475
2.2 Using the Estimate
2.2.1 The requirements in box 2.1 are to some extent interrelated. The accounting
officer of a department (see also chapter 3) is responsible for ensuring that:
2.2.2 the Estimate(s) presented to parliament for the department's annual
expenditure (consolidating its ALBs) are within the statutory powers and within the
government's expenditure plans; and
2.2.3 use of resources is within the ambit of the vote and consistent with the
Estimate(s)-
and must answer to parliament for stewardship of these responsibilities.
2.3 Treasury consents
2.3.1 Departments also need Treasury consent before undertaking expenditure or
making commitments which could lead to expenditure (see annex 2.1). Usually the
Treasury agrees some general approvals for each department subject to delegated
limits and/or exclusions.
2.3.2 Some common approaches to setting delegations are shown in box 2.2 and
are discussed further in annex 2.2. It is good practice to review delegations from
time to time to make sure that they remain up to date and appropriate. Delegations
can be tightened or loosened at reviews, depending on experience.
Box 2.2: examples of approaches to delegated authorities
* — objective criteria for exceptions requiring specific Treasury scrutiny or approval
* asampling mechanism to allow specimen cases to be examined
* a lower limit above which certain kinds of projects must achieve specific consent
2.3.3 In turn departments should agree with each of their arm’s length bodies (ALBs
- the public sector organisations they sponsor or finance) a similar set of delegations
appropriate to their business? (see also chapter 7)
2.3.4 There is an important category of expenditure commitments for which the
Treasury cannot delegate responsibility. It is transactions which set precedents, are
novel, contentious or could cause repercussions elsewhere in the public sector. Box
2.3 gives examples. Treasury consent to such transactions should always be
obtained before proceeding, even if the amounts in question lie within the
delegated limits.
2 Delegations to ALBs should never be greater than the delegated limits agreed between the Treasury and the sponsor department.
10
POL-BSFF-0233694_0013
POL00413475
POL00413475
Box 2.3: examples of transactions requiring explicit Treasury consent
* extra statutory payments similar to but outside statutory schemes
* ephemeral ex gratia payment schemes, eg payments to compensate for official errors
* special severance payments, eg compromise agreements in excess of contractual
commitments
* non-standard payments in kind
* unusual financial transactions, eg imposing lasting commitments or using tax avoidance
* unusual schemes or policies using novel techniques
2.3.5 It is improper for a public sector organisation to spend or make commitments
outside the agreed delegations. The Treasury may subsequently agree to give
retrospective consent, but only if the expenditure in question would have been
agreed if permission had been sought at the right time.
2.3.6 Sometimes legislation calls for explicit Treasury consent, eg for large or critical
projects. There are also Whitehall wide controls on key progress points for the very
largest projects.3 In such cases it is unlawful to proceed without Treasury consent -
and Treasury consent cannot be given retrospectively.
2.4 Regularity and propriety
2.4.1 The concepts of regularity and propriety, fundamental to the right use of
public funds, are set out in box 2.4. The term regularity and propriety is often used
to convey the idea of probity and ethics in the use of public funds — that is,
delivering public sector values in the round, encompassing the qualities summarised
in box 1.1. Supporting this concept are the Seven Principles of Public Life - the Nolan
principles¢ - which apply to the public sector at large. In striving to meet these
standards, central government departments should give a lead to the partners with
which they work.
Box 2.4: regularity and propriety
Regularity: compliant with the relevant legislation and wider legal principles such as subsidy control
and procurement law, delegated authorities and following the guidance in this document.
Propriety: meeting high standards of public conduct, including robust governance and the relevant
parliamentary expectations, especially transparency.
2.4.2 Each departmental accounting officer should make sure that ministers in their
department appreciate:
* the importance of operating with regularity and propriety; and
3 Through the Major Projects Authority, [htto: .cabinetoffice.gov.uk/content/major-projects-authorityl, using powers delegated
by the Treasury
4 httoy/wwnw.public-standards.gov.uk/
POL-BSFF-0233694_0014
the need for efficiency, economy, effectiveness and prudence in the administration
of public resources, to secure value for public money>
2.4.3 Should a minister seek a course of action which the accounting officer cannot
reconcile with any aspect of these requirements, they should seek instructions in
writing from the minister before proceeding (see chapter 3).
2.4.4 Should departments need to resolve an issue about regularity or propriety,
they should consult the relevant Treasury spending team. Similarly, ALBs should
consult their sponsor departments about such issues, and the department
concerned may in turn consult the Treasury.
2.4.5 Neither improper nor irregular expenditure achieves the standards that
parliament expects. So any such expenditure must be noted in the department's
annual report and accounts. If the discrepancy is material it can result in a
qualification to the accounts. When any expenditure of this kind comes to light, it
should be drawn to the attention of both the NAO and the Treasury. The immediate
follow up action is to identify the source of any systematic problems so that there is
no recurrence. The PAC may also call the accounting officer to explain the matter at
a public hearing.
2.5 Securing adequate legal authority
2.5.1 Parliament usually authorises spending on a specific policy or service by
approving bespoke legislation setting out in some detail how it should work. It is
not normally acceptable to use a royal charter as an alternative to primary
legislation, for this approach robs parliament of its expectations for control and
accountability. Departments should ensure that both they and their ALBs have
adequate legal cover for any specific actions they undertake.
2.5.2 The Treasury takes this requirement seriously. It is fundamental to the trust
and understanding between the government and parliament on which management
of the public finances is founded. In the Concordat of 1932 (see annex 2.3), the
Treasury undertook that departments would not spend without adequate legal
authority.
2.5.3 There are some general exceptions. These kinds of expenditure do not require
specific legislation in order to avoid burdening parliamentary time:
* routine matters covered by common law (the main examples are in box
2.5);
* avery limited range of Consolidated Fund Standing Services (see section
5.3);
2.5.4 Projects or services which are modest or temporary (see box 2.6). This
exception cannot be used to plug a gap in spending authority before specific
legislation for an ongoing service is passed. The temporary services derogation only
applies to initiatives lasting no more than two years in total, and it is therefore
important to note that this does not provide a two-year grace period for spending
on a new, ongoing service before specific legislation is required.
5 Amore detailed description of value for money is at annex 4.4
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0015
POL00413475
POL00413475
Box 2.5: expenditure which may rely on a Supply and Appropriation Act
* routine administration costs: employment costs, rent, cleaning etc
* lease agreements, eg for photocopiers, lifts
* contractual obligations to purchase goods or services (eg where single year contracts
might be bad value)
* expenditure using prerogative powers such as defence of the realm and international
treaty obligations
In all the three cases in paragraph 2.5.3, departments may rely on the sole authority
of a Supply and Appropriation Act (the culmination of the Estimates process)
without the need for specific legal authority, provided that the other conditions in
box 2.1 are met.
Box 2.6: modest or temporary expenditure which may rely on a Supply and Appropriation Act
either services or initiatives lasting no more than two years, eg a pilot study or one off intervention
or expenditure of no more than £1.75m a year (amount adjusted from time to time)
provided that there is no specific legislation covering these matters before parliament and existing
statutory restrictions are respected.
These conditions are demanding. Treasury consent is required before they may be relied on.
2.6 New services
2.6.1 When ministers decide on a new activity, all the conditions in box 2.1 must be
met before it can begin. In practical terms this means that most significant new
policies which are intended to persist require specific primary legislation
Sometimes ministers want to start early on a new policy which is intended to
continue but whose enabling legislation has not yet secured royal assent. It may be
possible to make limited preparation for delivery of the new service before royal
assent, but to do so it will usually be necessary to consider borrowing from the
Contingencies Fund (see annex 2.4). Access to this Fund is controlled by the
Treasury, subject to the conditions in box 2.7. Specific Treasury consent is always
required
Box 2.7: conditions for access to the contingencies fund (see also annex 2.4)
* the proposed expenditure must be urgent and in the public interest, ie with wider
benefits to outweigh the convention of awaiting parliamentary authority (political
imperative is not enough)
* the relevant bill must have successfully passed second reading in the House of
Commons
* the legislation must be certain, or virtually certain, to pass into law with no substantive
change in the near future, and usually within the financial year
* the department responsible must explain clearly to parliament what is to take place,
why, and by when matters should be placed on a normal footing.
POL-BSFF-0233694_0016
POL00413475
POL00413475
Chapter 3
Accounting Officers
This chapter sets out the personal responsibilities of all accounting officers in central government.
Essentially accounting officers must be able to assure parliament and the public of high standards of
probity in the management of public funds. This chapter is drawn to the attention of all accounting
officers when they are appointed.
3.1.1 Each organisation in central government — department, agency, trading fund, NHS
body, NDPB or arm’s length body — must have an accounting officer. This person is
usually its senior official. The accounting officer in an organisation should be
supported by a board structured in line with the Corporate Governance Code.
3.1.2 Formally the accounting officer in a public sector organisation is the person
who parliament calls to account for stewardship of its resources. The standards the
accounting officer is expected to deliver are summarised in box 3.1. The equivalent
senior business managers of other public sector organisations are expected to deliver
equivalent standards.
3.2 Appointment of accounting officers
3.2.1 The Treasury appoints the permanent head of each central government
department to be its accounting officer. Where there are several accounting officers
in a department, the permanent head is the principal accounting officer.
3.2.2 Within departments, the Treasury also appoints the chief executive of each
trading fund as its accounting officer.
3.2.3 In turn the principal accounting officer of each department normally appoints
the permanent heads:
e — of its executive agencies, as agency accounting officers for their
agencies; and
¢ — of other ALBs (including all NDPBs), as accounting officers for these
bodies; and
e at their discretion, additional accounting officers for defined part(s) of
the department's business
POL-BSFF-0233694_0017
3.3 Special responsibilities of accounting officers
POL00413475
POL00413475
Box 3.1; standards expected of the accounting officer's organisation
Acting within the authority of the minister(s) to whom they are responsible, the accounting
officer should ensure that the organisation, and any ALBs it sponsors, operates effectively and
to a high standard of probity. The organisation should:
governance
have a governance structure which transmits, delegates, implements and
enforces decisions
Have trustworthy internal controls to safeguard, channel and record resources as
intended
Work cooperatively with partners in the public interest
Operate with propriety and regularity in all its transactions
Treat its customers and business counterparties fairly, honestly and with integrity
Offer appropriate redress for failure to meet agreed customer standards
Give timely, transparent and realistic accounts of its business and decisions,
underpinning public confidence;
Decision-making
Support its ministers with clear, well reasoned, timely and impartial advice
Make all its decisions in line with the strategy, aims and objectives of the
organisation set by ministers and/or in legislation
Take a balanced view of the organisation's approach to managing opportunity
and risk
Impose no more than proportionate and defensible burdens on business;
Financial management
Use its resources efficiently, economically and effectively, avoiding waste and
extravagance
Plan to use its resources on an affordable and sustainable path, within agreed
limits
Carry out procurement and project appraisal objectively and fairly, using cost
benefit analysis and generally seeking good value for the Exchequer as a whole
Use management information systems to gain assurance about value for money
and the quality of delivery and so make timely adjustments
Avoid over defining detail and imposing undue compliance costs, either internally
or on its customers and stakeholders
Have practical documented arrangements for controlling or working in
partnership with other organisations, as appropriate
Use internal and external audit to improve its internal controls and performance.
3.3.1 It is important that each accounting officer takes personal responsibility for
ensuring that the organisation they manages delivers the standards in box 3.1. In
particular, the accounting officer must personally sign: the accounts; the annual
report the governance statement (see annex 3.1); and having been satisfied that
they have been properly prepared to reflect the business of the organisation, must
POL-BSFF-0233694_0018
personally approve: voted budget limits; and the associated Estimates
Memorandum
3.3.2 The accounting officer of a corporate arm’s length body should arrange for a
board member to sign the accounts as well as signing them himself or herself, if
(unusually) they are not a member of the board.
3.3.3 There are several other areas where accounting officers should take personal
responsibility:
e — regularity and propriety (see box 2.4), including securing Treasury
approval for any expenditure outside the normal delegations or outside
the subheads of Estimates;
e affordability and sustainability: respecting agreed budgets and avoiding
unaffordable longer term commitments, taking a proportionate view
about other demands for resources;
« — value for money: ensuring that the organisation's procurement,
projects and processes are systematically evaluated to provide
confidence about suitability, effectiveness, prudence, quality, good
value judged for the Exchequer as a whole, not just for the accounting
officer's organisation (eg using the Green Book’ to evaluate
alternatives);
control: the accounting officer should personally approve and confirm
their agreement to all Cabinet Committee papers and major project or
policy initiatives before they proceed;
*® management of opportunity and risk to achieve the right balance
commensurate with the institution’s business and risk appetite;
« — learning from experience, both using internal feedback (eg through
managing projects and programmes using techniques such as
PRINCE2), and from right across the public sector; and
* accounting accurately for the organisation’s financial position and
transactions: to ensure that its published financial information is
transparent and up to date; and that the organisation’s efficiency in the
use of resources is tracked and recorded
3.3.4 In the case of principal accounting officers, these responsibilities apply to the
business of the whole departmental group.
3.4 Advice to ministers
3.4.1 Each departmental accounting officer should take care to bring to the
attention of the minister(s) to whom they are responsible any conflict between the
minister's instructions and their duties. The accounting officer cannot simply accept
the minister's aims or policy without examination. There is no set form for
registering objections, though the accounting officer should be specific about their
1 to httosy/ww.gov.uk/government/oublications/the-green-book-appraisal-and-evaluation-in-central-governent
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0019
POL00413475
POL00413475
nature. The acid test is whether the accounting officer could justify the proposed
activity if asked to defend it.
3.4.2 Accounting officers should routinely scrutinise significant policy proposals or
plans to start or vary major projects and then assess whether they measure up to the
standards in box 3.1 so that they can identify any discrepancy2. The accounting
officer should draw any such problems to the attention of the responsible minister
to see whether they can be resolved.
3.4.3 If the minister decides to continue with a course the accounting officer has
advised against, the accounting officer should ask for a formal written direction to
proceed. An oral direction should be confirmed in writing quickly. Examples of
where this procedure is appropriate are in box 3.2
Box 3.2: when accounting officers should seek a direction
* Regularity: (see Chapter 2) if a proposal is outside statutory powers, parliamentary
authority or Treasury delegations; or incompatible with the agreed spending budgets.
* Propriety: if a proposal would breach parliamentary control procedures or expectations.
+ Value for money: if an alternative proposal, or doing nothing, would deliver better
value, eg a cheaper, higher quality or more effective outcome for the Exchequer as a
whole.
* Feasibility: where there is a significant doubt about whether the proposal can be
implemented accurately, sustainably, or to the intended timetable.
3.4.4 Directions of this kind are rare. It is good practice for accounting officers to
discuss the matter with the Treasury if time permits. The ultimate judgement in each
case must lie with the accounting officer personally.
3.4.5 When a direction is made, the accounting officer should
copy the relevant papers to the C&AG and the TOA promptly. The
C&AG will normally draw the matter to the attention of the PAC, who
will attach no blame to the accounting officer;
e follow the minister's direction without further ado;
e — if asked, explain the minister's course of action. This respects ministers’
rights to frank advice, while protecting the quality of internal debate;
* arrange for the existence of the direction to be published, no later than
in the next report and accounts, unless the matter must be kept
confidential
3.5 Public Accounts Committee
3.5.1 The PAC may hold public hearings on the accounts of central government
organisations laid in parliament (see section 1.6). In practice most PAC hearings
focus on NAO value for money studies. NAO seeks to agree the text of these reports
2 The Treasury or the chair of the relevant Cabinet Committee may also ask for the accounting officer's assessment of any novel
proposal.
POL-BSFF-0233694_0020
with the accounting officer(s) concerned so there is a clear undisputed evidence
base for PAC scrutiny.
3.5.2 When a hearing is scheduled, the PAC normally invites the accounting
officer(s) of the relevant institution(s) to attend as witness(es). An accounting officer
may be accompanied by appropriate officials. Where it is appropriate, and the PAC
agrees, an accounting officer may send a substitute. The PAC may also invite other
witnesses who may not be public servants to give insight into the background of the
subject in hand
3.5.3 In answering questions, the accounting officer should take responsibility for
the organisation’s business, even if it was delegated or if the events in question
happened before they was appointed accounting officer. In response to specific PAC
or Select Committee requests, previous accounting officers may also attend relevant
PAC hearings. Recalls of this kind should be assessed case by case, depending on the
circumstances. They are acceptable if the business in issue was fairly recent, and
where the former accounting officer has had an opportunity to comment before
publication on any NAO report which the PAC is to investigate.
3.5.4 The PAC expects witnesses to give clear, accurate and complete evidence. If
evidence is sensitive, witnesses may ask to give it in private. Witnesses may offer
supplementary notes if the information sought is not to hand at the meeting. Any
such notes should be provided within one week unless the PAC is willing to grant an
extension. They should do so without delay.
3.5.5 The TOA (or an alternate) attends all PAC hearings. This enables the PAC to
explore any more general issues arising out of the hearing.
3.6 When the accounting officer is not available
3.6.1 Each public sector organisation must have an accounting officer available for
advice or decision as necessary at short notice.
3.6.2 When the accounting officer is absent and cannot readily be contacted,
another senior official should deputise. If a significant absence is planned, the
accounting officer may invite the Treasury (or the sponsor department, as the case
may be) to appoint a temporary acting accounting officer.
3.7 Conflicts of interest
3.7.1 Sometimes an accounting officer faces an actual or potential conflict of
interest. There must be no doubt that the accounting officer meets the standards
described in box 3.1 without divided loyalties. Possible ways of managing this issue
include
e¢ — For a minor conflict, declaring the conflict and arranging for someone
other than the accounting officer to make a decision on the issue(s) in
question;
e — For a significant but temporary conflict, inviting the treasury (or the
sponsor department, as the case may be) to appoint an interim
accounting officer for the period of the conflict of interest; or
e — For serious and lasting conflicts, resignation.
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0021
3.8 Arm’s length bodies
3.8.1 The responsibilities of accounting officers in departments and in arm’s length
bodies (ALBs) are essentially similar. Accounting officers in ALBs must also take
account of their special responsibilities and powers. In particular, they must respect
the legislation (or equivalent) establishing the organisation and terms of the
framework document agreed with the sponsor department. See chapter 7 for more.
3.8.2 The framework document (or equivalent) agreed between an ALB and its
sponsor always provides for the sponsor department to exercise meaningful
oversight of the ALB’s strategy and performance, pay arrangements and/or major
financial transactions, eg by monthly returns, standard delegations and exception
reporting. The sponsor department's accounts consolidate those of its ALBs so its
accounting officer must be satisfied that the consolidated accounts are accurate and
not misleading.
3.8.3 Overall, the accounting officer of a sponsor department should make
arrangements to satisfy himself or herself that that the ALB has systems adequate to
meet the standards in box 3.1. Similarly, the accounting officer of an ALB with a
subsidiary should have meaningful oversight of the subsidiary. It is not acceptable to
establish ALBs, or subsidiaries to ALBs, in order to avoid or weaken parliamentary
scrutiny.
3.8.4 Exceptionally, the accounting officer of a sponsor department may need to
intervene if an ALB drifts significantly off track, eg if its budget is threatened, its
systems are badly defective or it falls into disrepute. This may include replacing some
or all of the leaders of the ALB, possibly even its accounting officer.
3.8.5 There are sensitivities about the role of the accounting officer in an ALB which
is governed by an independent fiduciary board, eg a charity or company. The ALB’s
accounting officer, who will normally be a member of the board, must take care
that their personal legal responsibilities do not conflict with their duties as a board
member. In particular, the accounting officer should vote against any proposal
which appears to cause such a conflict; it is not sufficient to abstain.
3.8.6 Moreover, if the chair or board of such an ALB is minded to instruct its
accounting officer to carry out a course inconsistent with the standards in box 3.1,
then the accounting officer should make their reservations clear, preferably in
writing. If the board is still minded to proceed, the ALB accounting officer should
then:
« ask the accounting officer of the sponsor department to consider
intervening to resolve the difference of view, preferably in writing;
e — if the board’s decision stands, seek its written direction to carry it out,
asking the sponsor department to inform the Treasury;
* proceed to implement without delay; and
e — follow the routine in paragraph 3.4.5.
3.8.7 This process is similar to what happens in departments (see section 3.4),
allowing for the special position of the organisation's board, which is often
appointed under statute.
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0022
POL00413475
POL00413475
3.9 In the round
3.9.1 It is not realistic to set firm rules for every aspect of the business with which an
accounting officer may deal. Sometimes the accounting officer may need to take a
principled decision on the facts in circumstances with no precedents. Should that
happen, the accounting officer should be guided by the standards in box 3.1 in
assessing whether there is a case for seeking a direction for any of the factors in box
3.2. It is essential that accounting officers seek good outcomes for the Exchequer as
a whole, respecting the key principles of transparency and parliamentary approval
for management of public resources.
3.9.2 Where time permits, the Treasury stands ready to help accounting officers
think such issues through. It is good practice to document decisions where the
accounting officer has had to strike difficult judgements, especially where they break
new ground.
20
POL-BSFF-0233694_0023
POL00413475
POL00413475
Chapter 4
Governance and Management
Public sector organisations should have good quality internal governance and sound financial
management. Appropriate delegation of responsibilities and effective mechanisms for internal
reporting should ensure that performance can be kept on track. Good practice should be followed in
procuring and managing resources and assets; hiring and managing staff; and deterring waste, fraud
and other malpractice. Central government departments have some specific responsibilities for
reporting, including to parliament.
4.1.1 Each public sector organisation should establish governance arrangements
appropriate to its business, scale and culture. The structure should combine efficient
decision making with accountability and transparency.
4.1.2 In doing so, central government departments should be guided by the
Corporate Governance Code3 . Each public sector organisation needs clear
leadership, normally provided by a board. Box 4.1 sets out best practice for
departmental boards.
Box 4.1: best practice for boards in central government departments
* chaired by the department's most senior minister, with junior ministers as members
* comparable numbers of official and non-executive members, including a lead non-
executive and a professionally qualified finance director (see annex 4.1)
* meeting at least quarterly
* sets the department's strategy to implement ministers’ policy decisions
* leads the department's business and determines its culture
* ensures good management of the department's resources — financial, assets, people
* — decides risk appetite and monitors emerging threats and opportunities
* steers performance to keep it on track using regularly updated information about
progress
* — keeps an overview of its ALBs’ activities
4.1.3 It is good practice for ALBs to use similar principles. In many ALBs some
structural features, such as board composition, derive from statute but considerable
discretion may remain. In some organisations it is usual, or found valuable, for the
board to include members with designated responsibility or expertise, eg for
regional affairs or for specialist professional skills
4.1.4 In order to carry out its responsibilities each board needs to decide, and
document, how it will operate. Box 4.2 outlines the key decisions. It is not
3 hetosy”wwww.gow.ul/government/publications/corporate-governance-code-for-central-government-deoartmentsfor both the
code and the good practice guidance
21
POL-BSFF-0233694_0024
POL00413475
POL00413475
exhaustive. Once agreed, the working rules should be reviewed from time to time to
keep them relevant. Boards should challenge themselves to improve their working
methods, so that their processes can achieve and maintain good modern business
practice
Box 4.2: key decisions for boards
* — mission and objectives
* — delegations and arrangements for reporting performance
* procedures and processes for business decision making
* scrutiny, challenge and control of significant policies, initiatives and projects
* risk appetite and risk control procedures, eg maintaining and reviewing a risk register
* control and management of associated ALBs and other partnerships
* arrangements for refreshing the board
* arrangements for reviewing the board’s own performance
* accountability — to the general public, to staff and other stakeholders (see section 4.13)
* how the insights of non-executives can be harnessed
* how often the board's working rules will be reviewed
4.2 Working methods
4.2.1 The accounting officer of each organisation is accountable to parliament for
the quality of the administration that they leads. The administrative standards
expected are set out in the Civil Service Code4 and the Ombudsman’s Principles of
Public Administration’. They allow considerable flexibility to fit with each
organisation's obligations and culture. It is against these standards that failure to
deliver is assessed.
4.2.2 Another fundamental concept is the Treasury's leadership position in
managing public expenditure, and setting the rules under which departments and
their ALBs should deploy the assets, people and other resources under their control.
In turn each public sector organisation should have robust and effective systems for
their internal management. Box 4.3 outlines the key decisions each organisation
needs to make.
4.2.3 To help the Treasury carry out this task properly:
* departments should provide the Treasury with accurate and timely
information about in-year developments - their expenditure,
performance against objectives and evolution of risk (eg serious
unforeseen events or discovery of fraud);
* — ALBs should provide their sponsor departments with similar
information; and
4 httpyAwww.civilservice. gov.uk/about/values
5 httoy/www.ombudsman.org.uk/improving-public-service/ombudsmansorincioles
22
POL-BSFF-0233694_0025
POL00413475
POL00413475
* the established mechanisms for controlling and reporting public
expenditure, including Treasury support or approval where necessary,
should be respected.
4.2.4 In particular, departments should consult the Treasury (and ALBs their sponsor
departments) at an early stage about proposals to undertake unusual transactions or
financing techniques. This applies especially to any transactions which may have
wider implications elsewhere in the public sector (see paragraph 2.3.4 and box 2.3).
4.2.5 Working with the accounting officer, the finance director of each public sector
organisation has special responsibility for seeing that the standards described in this
chapter are respected. Annex 4.1.sets this out in more detail.
Box 4.3: essentials of effective internal decision making
choice
* active management of the portfolio of risks and opportunities
* appraisal of alternative courses of action using the techniques in the Green Book, and
including assessment of feasibility to achieve value for money
* where appropriate, use of models (see annex 4.2) or pilot studies to provide evidence
on which to make decisions among policy or project choices
* active steering of initiatives, eg reviews to take stock at critical points of projects
operation
* appropriate internal delegations, with a single senior responsible officer (SRO) for each
significant project or initiative, and a single senior person leading each end to end
process
* prompt, regular and meaningful management information on costs (including unit
costs), efficiency, quality and performance against targets to track progress and value
for money
* proportionate administration and enforcement mechanisms, without unnecessary
complexity
* use of feedback from internal and external audit and elsewhere to improve performance
* regular risk monitoring, to track performance and experience and make adjustments in
response
afterwards
* mechanisms to evaluate policy, project and programme outputs and outcomes,
including whether to continue, adjust or end any continuing activities
* arrangements to draw out and propagate lessons from experience
4.3 Opportunity and risk
4.3.1 Embedded in each public sector organisation's internal systems there should
be arrangements for recognising, tracking and managing its opportunities and risks.
Each organisation’s governing body should make a considered choice about its
desired risk appetite, taking account of its legal obligations, ministers’ policy
decisions, its business objectives, and public expectations of what it should deliver.
23
POL-BSFF-0233694_0026
This can mean that different organisations take different approaches to the same
opportunities or risks.
4.3.2 There should be a regular discipline of reappraising the opportunities and risks
facing the organisation since both alter with time and circumstances, as indeed may
the chosen responses. This process should avoid excessive caution, since it can be as
damaging as unsuitable risk taking. The assessment should normally include:
* — maintaining a risk register, covering identified risks and contingent risks
from horizon scanning;
* reputational risks, since poor performance could undermine the
credibility, and ultimately the creditworthiness, of the Exchequer as a
whole;
* consideration of the dangers of maintaining the status quo;
* plans for disaster recovery;
* appraisal of end to end risks in critical processes and other significant
activities.
4.3.3 In making decisions about how to manage and control opportunity and risk,
audit evidence and other assurance processes can usefully inform choice. Audit,
including internal audit, can provide specific, objective and well-informed assurance
and insight to help an organisation evaluate its effectiveness in achieving its
objectives. It is good practice for the audit committee to advise the governing board
of a public sector organisation on its key decisions on governance and managing
opportunities and risks. It is also a good discipline for this process to include
evaluating progress in implementing PAC recommendations, where they have been
accepted.
4.3.4 In turn the board should support the accounting officer in drawing up the
governance statement, which forms part of each organisation’s annual accounts.
See annex 3.1. Further guidance about managing risks is in annex 4.3 and the
Orange Book.
4.4 Insurance
4.4.1 In the private sector risk is often managed by taking out insurance. In central
government it is generally not good value for money to do so. This is because the
public sector has a wide and diverse asset portfolio; a reliable income through its
ability to raise revenue through taxation; and access to borrowed funds more
cheaply than any in the private sector. In addition commercial providers of insurance
also have to meet their own costs and profit margins. Hence the public purse is
uniquely able to finance restitution of damaged assets or deal with other risks, even
very large ones. If the government insured risk, public services would cost more.
4.4.2 However, there are some limited circumstances in which it is appropriate for
public sector organisations to insure. They include legal obligations®, and occasions
6 Eg ALBs should insure vehicles where the Road Traffic Act requires it
24
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0027
POL00413475
POL00413475
where commercial insurance would provide value for money’. Further information
about insurance generally is in annex 4.4.
4.5 Control of public expenditure
4.5.1 The Treasury coordinates a system through which departments are allocated
budget control totals for their public expenditure. Each department's allocation
covers its own spending and that of its associated ALBs. Within the agreed totals, it
has considerable discretion over setting priorities to deliver the public services for
which it is responsible.
4.5.2 Each public sector organisation should run efficient systems for managing
payments (see box 4.4). It should also keep its use of public resources within the
agreed budgets, take the limits into account when entering into commitments, and
generally ensure that its spending profile is sustainable.
4.5.3 Any major project, programme or initiative should be led by a senior
responsible owner (SRO). It is good practice to aim for continuity in such
appointmentss.
Box 4.4: essentials of systems for committing and paying funds
* — Selection of projects after appraisal of the alternatives (see the Green Book), including
the central clearance processes for larger commitments.
* Open competition to select suppliers from a diverse range, preferably specifying
outcomes rather than specific products, to achieve value for money (see annexes 4.6
and 4.7).
* Where feasible, procurement through multi-purchaser arrangements, shared services
and/or standard contracts to drive down prices.
* Effective internal controls to authorise acquisition of goods or services (including vetting
new suppliers), within any legal constraints.
* Separation of authorisation and payment, with appropriate controls, including
validation and recording, at each step to provide a clear audit trail.
* — Checks that the goods or services acquired have been supplied in accordance with the
relevant contract(s) or agreement(s) before paying for them.
* Payment terms chosen or negotiated to provide good value.
* Accurate payment of invoices: once and on time, avoiding lateness penalties (see annex
4.8).
* A balance of preventive and detective controls to tackle and deter fraud, corruption and
other malpractice (see annex 4.9).
* Integrated systems to generate automatic audit trails which can be used to generate
accounts and which both internal and external auditors can readily check.
* Periodic reviews to benefit from experience, improve value for money or to implement
developments in good practice
7 Eg where private sector contractors take out single-site insurance policies because they are cheaper than each individual party
insuring themselves separately,
8 see annex 4.5.
25
POL-BSFF-0233694_0028
POL00413475
POL00413475
4.6 Receipts
4.6.1 Public sector organisations should have arrangements for identifying,
collecting and recording all amounts due to them promptly and in full. Outstanding
amounts should be followed up diligently. Key features of internal systems of
control are suggested in box 4.5.
4.6.2 Public sector organisations should take care to track and enforce debts
promptly. The presumption should be in favour of recovery unless it is uneconomic
to do so
Box 4.5: essential features of systems for collecting sums due
* Adequate records to enable claims to be made and pursued in full
* — Routines to prevent unauthorised deletions and amendments to claims.
* Credit management systems to manage and pursue amounts outstanding.
* — Controls to prevent diversion of funds and other frauds.
* — Clear lines of responsibility for making decisions about pressing claims increasingly more
firmly, and for deciding on any abatement or abandonment of claims which may be
merited
* Arrangements for deciding upon and reporting any write-offs (see annex 4.10). Audit
trails which can readily be checked and reported upon both internally and externally.
4.7 Non-standard financial transactions
4.7.1 From time to time public sector organisations may find it makes sense to carry
out transactions outside the usual planned range, eg:
* — write-offs of unrecoverable debts or overpayments;
* recognising losses of stocks or other assets;
+ — long term loans or gifts of assets.
4.7.2 In each case it is important to deal with the issue in the public interest, with
due regard for probity and value for money. Annexes 4.10 to 4.12 set out what is
expected when such transactions take place in central government, including
notifying parliament.
4.7.3 Where an organisation discovers an underpayment, the deficit should be
made good as soon as is practicable and in full. If there has been a lapse of time, for
example caused by legal action to establish the correct position, it may be
appropriate to consider paying interest, depending on the nature of the
commitment to the payee and taking into account the reputation of the
organisation and value for money for the Exchequer as a whole (see also section
4.11).
4.7.4 Similarly, public sector organisations may have reason to carry out current
transactions which would not normally be planned for. These might be:
* extra contractual payments to service providers;
26
POL-BSFF-0233694_0029
POL00413475
POL00413475
* extra-statutory payments to claimants (where a similar statutory scheme
exists);
* ex gratia payments to customers (where no established scheme exists);
or
* severance payments to employees leaving before retirement or before
the end of their contract and involving payments above what the
relevant pension scheme allows.
4.7.5 Again it is important that these payments are made in the public interest,
objectively and without favouritism. The disciplines parliament expects of central
government entities are set out in annex 4.13, which explains the notification
procedure to be followed for larger one-off transactions of this kind. The steps to be
considered when setting up statutory or extra-statutory compensation schemes are
discussed in annex 4.14.
4.8 Unusual circumstances
4.8.1 Sometimes public sector organisations face dilemmas in meeting their
commitments. They may have a legal or business obligation which would be
uneconomic or inappropriate to carry out assiduously to the letter. In such cases it
can be justifiable to seek a pragmatic, just and transparent alternative approach,
appropriately reported to parliament in the organisation's annual accounts. One-off
schemes of this kind are always novel and so require Treasury approval, not least
because they may also require legislation or have to rest on the authority of a Supply
and Appropriation Act (see section 2.5). Box 4.6 suggests precedented examples.
Box 4.6: examples of one-off pragmatic schemes
* Acourt ruling could mean that a public sector organisation owed each of a large
number of people a very small sum of money. The cost of setting up and operating an
accurate payment scheme might exceed the total amount due. The organisation could
instead make a one-off payment of equivalent value to a charity representing the
recipient group.
* Adispute with a contractor might conclude that the contractor owed a public sector
organisation an amount too big for it to meet in a single year while staying solvent. The
customer might instead agree more favourable payment terms, with appropriate
safeguards, if this arrangement provides better value for money.
4.9 Staff
4.9.1 Each public sector organisation should have sufficient staff with the skills and
expertise to manage its business efficiently and effectively. The span of skills required
should match the organisation’s objectives, responsibilities and resources, balancing
professional, practical or operational skills and policy makers, and recognising the
value of each discipline. Succession and disaster planning should ensure that the
organisation can cope robustly with changes in the resources available, including
unforeseen disruption
4.9.2 Public sector organisations should seek to be fair, honest and considerate
employers. Some desirable characteristics are suggested in box 4.7.
27
POL-BSFF-0233694_0030
POL00413475
POL00413475
Box 4.7: public sector organisations as good employers
* selection designed to value and make good use of talent and potential of all kinds
* — fairness, integrity, honesty, impartiality and objectivity
* professionalism in the relevant disciplines, always including finance
* arrangements to make sure that staff are loaded cost effectively
* management techniques balancing incentives to improve and disciplines for poor
performance
* diversity valued and personal privacy respected
* — mechanisms to support efficient working practices, both normally and under pressure
* arrangements for whistleblowers to identify problems privately without repercussions.
4.9.3 Similarly public sector employers have a right to expect good standards of
conduct from their employees. The qualities and standards expected of civil servants
are set out in the Civil Service Code. Other public sector employees should strive for
similar standards, appropriate to their context.
4.10 Assets
4.10.1 All public sector organisations own or use a range of assets. Each
organisation needs to devise an appropriate asset management strategy to define
how it acquires, maintains, tracks, deploys and disposes of the various kinds of
assets it uses. Annex 4.15 discusses how to set up and use such a strategy.
4.10.2 It is good practice for public sector organisations to take stock of their assets
from time to time and consider afresh whether they are being used efficiently and
deliver value for public funds. If there is irreducible spare capacity there may be
scope to use part of it for other government activities, or to exploit it commercially
for non-statutory business.
4.11 Standards of service
4.11.1 Poor quality public services are not acceptable. Public sector organisations
should define what their customers, business counterparties and other stakeholders
can expect of them
4.11.2 Standards can be expressed in a number of ways. Examples include
guidelines (eg response times), targets (eg take-up rates) or a collection of customer
rights in a charter. Even where standards are not set explicitly, they may sometimes
be inferred from the way the provider organisation carries out its responsibilities; so
it is normally better to express them directly.
4.11.3 Whatever standards are set, they should be defined in a measurable way,
with plans for recording performance, so that delivery can be readily gauged. It is
good practice to use customer feedback, including from complaints, to reassess
from time to time whether standards or their proxies (milestones, targets, outcomes)
remain appropriate and meaningful.
4.11.4 Where public sector organisations fail to meet their standards, or where they
fall short of reasonable behaviour, it may be appropriate to consider offering
remedies. These can take a variety of forms, including apologies, restitution (eg
28
POL-BSFF-0233694_0031
supplying a missing licence) or, in more serious cases, financial payments. Decisions
about financial remedies — which should not be offered routinely - should include
taking account of the legal rights of the other party or parties and the impact on the
organisation's future business.
4.11.5 Any such payments, whether statutory or ex gratia, should follow good
practice (see section 4.13). Since schemes of financial redress often set precedents
or have implications elsewhere, they should be cleared with the Treasury before
commitments are made, just as with any other public expenditure out of the normal
pattern (see sections 2.1 to 2.4).
4.12 Complaints
4.12.1 Those public sector organisations which deal with customers directly should
strive to achieve clear, accurate and reliable standards for the products and services
they provide. It is good practice to arrange for complaints about performance to be
reviewed by an independent organisation such as an ombudsman.
4.12.2 Often such review processes are statutory. The activities of central
government departments and the NHS are open to review by the PHSO2, whose
Principles of Good Complaints Handling? sets out generic advice on complaints
handling and administration of redress (see also annex 4.14). After investigation of
cases of specific complaint, the PHSO can rule on whether injustice or hardship can
be attributed to maladministration or service failure, and may recommend remedies,
either for individual cases or for groups of similar cases. If departments decline to
follow the PHSO’s advice, they should lay a memorandum in parliament explaining
why.
4.13 Transparency
4.13.1 All public sector organisations should operate as openly as is compatible with
the requirements of their business. In line with the statutory public rights'', they
should make available timely information about their services, standards and
performance. This material should strike a careful balance between protecting
confidentiality and open disclosure in the public interest.
4.13.2 All public sector organisations should adopt a publication scheme routinely
offering information about the organisation's activities. They should also publish
regular information about their plans, performance and use of public resources.
4.13.3 The published information should be in sufficient detail, and be sufficiently
regular, to enable users and other stakeholders to hold the organisation and its
ministers to account. Benchmarks can help local users to evaluate local performance
more easily
4.13.4 The primary document of record for central government departments is the
report and accounts, which should consolidate information about the relevant ALBs.
It should include a governance statement (see annex 3.1)
9 httoy/www.ombudsman.org.uk/
10 httoyAwww.ombudsman.org.uk/improving-public-service/ombudsmansprinciples
11 Eg Freedom of information act 2000, Data protection act 1998, Environment information regulations 2004 and the Re-use of
pulblic sector information regulations 2005,
29
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0032
POL00413475
POL00413475
4.13.5 In addition, the Treasury is responsible for publishing certain aggregate
information about use of public resources, for example Whole of Government
Accounts (WGA) consolidating all central and local government organisations’
accounts and comparisons of outturn with budgets. The Office for National
Statistics (ONS) also uses input from data gathered by the Treasury to publish the
national accounts.
4.13.6 In certain areas of public business it is also important or desirable to provide
adequate public access to physical assets. Unnecessary or disproportionate
restrictions should be avoided. Managed properly, this can be a valuable mechanism
to promote inclusion and enhance public accountability.
4.14 Dealing with initiatives
4.14.1 Public sector organisations need to integrate all the advice in this handbook
when introducing new policies or planning projects. Each is unique and will need
bespoke treatment. The checklist in box 4.8 brings the different factors together. It
applies directly to central government organisations but the principles will be of
value elsewhere.
30
POL-BSFF-0233694_0033
POL00413475
POL00413475
Box 4.8: factors to consider when planning policies or projects
design
* Has the proposal been evaluated against alternative options, including doing nothing?
* Should there be pilot testing before full roll out?
* Are the controls agreed and documented clearly? Have the risks and opportunities been
considered systematically? Is the change process resilient to shocks? What contingencies
might arise?
* Is the intended intervention proportionate to the identified need?
* What standards should be achieved? How will performance be tracked and assessed?
Could the proposal be simplified without loss of function?
* If partner(s) are involved, is the allocation of responsibilities appropriate?
* Will the proposal be efficient, effective and offer good value for money?
* Is the policy sustainable in the broadest sense? Should it have a sunset clause?
* Does the planned activity meet high standards of probity, integrity and honesty?
* Will the proposal deliver the desired outcome to time and cost?
* Does the accounting officer assess the initiative as compatible with the public sector
standards?
control
* What prior agreement is required, if any?
* How will internal governance and delegation work? Will it be effective? Is it transparent?
Should there be an SRO?
* Is there adequate legislation? If not, what is needed to make the action lawful?
* How will the proposal be financed? Is there budget and Estimate cover? Is it appropriate
to charge to help finance the service? Are charges set within the law?
Is the proposed action within the department's delegated authorities?
What financial techniques will be used to manage rollout, implementation and operation?
Are project and programme management techniques likely to be useful?
How will the intended new arrangements be monitored and efficiency measured?
How will feedback be used to improve outcomes?
Does the design inhibit misuse and counter fraud? What safeguards are needed?
Has the risk of fraud been assessed to help inform policy or project design?
* How will the associated risks be tracked and the responses adjusted?
* What intervention will be possible if things go off track?
* Would it be possible to recover from a disaster promptly?
accountability
* How should parliament be told of the proposal and kept informed of progress?
* What targets will be used? Are they sufficiently stretching?
* Is public access called for? How?
Is the policy or service fair and impartial?
Will its administration be open, transparent and accessible?
Should there be customer standards? How are complaints used to improve performance?
Should there be arrangements for redress after poor delivery?
Is enforcement required? If so, is it proportionate?
* Is an appeal mechanism needed?
* Is regulation called for?
learning lessons
* What audit arrangements (internal and external) are intended?
* What information about the activity will be published? How and how often?
* When and how will the policy or project be evaluated to assess its cost and benefits and to
determine whether it should continue, be adjusted, replaced or ceased?
31
POL-BSFF-0233694_0034
POL00413475
POL00413475
Chapter 5
Funding
This chapter explores the means by which central government organisations may obtain funds in
order to finance public expenditure. The Treasury operates disciplines to respect parliament's concern
to prevent unauthorised expenditure.
5.1.1 Most public expenditure is financed from centrally agreed multi-year budgets
administered by the Treasury, which oversees departments’ use of their budget
allocations. In the main, departments have considerable discretion about how they
distribute these budget allocations, which are expressed net of relevant income. The
main source of receipts to be netted off is fees and charges (see chapter 6).
5.1.2 The Treasury oversees and directs the rules that departments should respect in
managing their budgets. Departments are expected to live within their allocations
for each financial year, with some limited exceptions, eg for certain demand led
services, The budgeting framework is explained in the Consolidated Budgeting
Guidance, which is refreshed each year.
5.2 Grants
5.2.1 Each central government department decides how much of its budget
provision it should cascade to its ALBs in each year of the multi-year agreement
Departments may pay them grants (for specific purposes) and grants-in-aid
(unspecific support) to finance their spending; though it is the net spending of the
ALB that scores in the departmental budget. Annex 5.1 explains more about grants.
5.2.2 Budgets and Estimates plan net spending and include all spending of ALBs
however it is financed. In general it is sensible to consider arrangements for
protecting the Exchequer interest through clawback of specific grants should the
purposes for which they are agreed not materialise (annex 5.2).
5.3 Estimates
5.3.1 The multiyear departmental budgets agreed collectively among ministers do
not of themselves confer authority to spend or commit resources. Parliamentary
agreement, usually through the Supply Estimate process, is also essential (see box
2.1).
5.3.2 Departmental Estimates are put to parliament covering one financial year at a
time, in the spring. Each covers the net expenditure of a department and its ALBs (ie
all spending in budgets and any voted spend outside of budgets). For the year
ahead, the provision sought should be taut and realistic, without padding. The
Supply and Estimates Guidance Manual has more detail.
32
POL-BSFF-0233694_0035
5.3.3 Before the summer recess, the provision sought in the Estimate is formally
authorised in a Supply and Appropriation Act, which sets net expenditure limits for
the year. The Act is then the legal authority for public expenditure within the ambit
of the Estimate. The ambit itemises a specific range of permitted activities and
income streams for the year.
5.3.4 Within a financial year, there is some scope for transferring (through virement)
provision from one section or subhead to another within any of the control limits in
the same Estimate. There is scope for adjusting Estimate provision through a
Supplementary Estimate late in the year if circumstances change. A Supplementary
Estimate should show all movements between sections, even if they would
otherwise have been dealt with through virement.
5.3.5 Departmental Select Committees may examine departmental witnesses on the
plans contained in Estimates. Usually such hearings take place after Estimates are
laid in parliament but before they are voted into law.
5.3.6 If there is underspending against Estimate provision in one year, it cannot
automatically be carried forward to a later year. If a department wants to spend
resources it did not consume in a previous year, it needs Treasury approval and must
also obtain fresh parliamentary authority to spend in the year(s) concerned.
5.3.7 Like budgets, Estimates are set net of income. But parliament needs to be
made aware of receipts since Estimates authorise gross expenditure, normally using
statutory powers. Annex 5.3 explains more about of types of receipt. Chapter 6
contains guidance about setting and adjusting fees and charges.
5.3.8 Occasionally an Estimate sets a negative limit for permitted resources. This
happens if income is expected to exceed the relevant gross expenditure. Similarly a
Supplementary Estimate can be negative if provision for spending is to fall within a
given year.
5.3.9 A department's Estimate for a year includes all spending within its agreed
budget for that year, as well as any voted non-budget spending. Not all of this
amount requires voted parliamentary approval since some items, such as
Consolidated Fund Standing Services, are paid direct from the Consolidated Fund
Hence only the voted parts of the Estimate requiring parliamentary approval appear
in the Supply and Appropriation Act. Of course the disciplines on public funds (box
3.1) apply to all the activities described in the Estimate and accounts whether within
the Act or not.
5.4 Excess Votes
5.4.1 Accounting officers have an important role in overseeing the integrity of the
Estimates for which they are responsible. In particular, accounting officers are
responsible for ensuring that Estimates are in good order (see section 2.2).
5.4.2 The Treasury presents parliament each year with a Statement of Excesses to
request retrospective authority for any unauthorised resources consumed above the
relevant limits or outside the ambit of the Estimate. Parliament takes these excesses
seriously. The PAC or departmental select committee may call witnesses to account
in person or ask for a written explanation.
5.4.3 The Statement of Excesses includes two kinds of excess:
33,
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0036
POL00413475
POL00413475
* spending above the amount provided in an Estimate; and
e — irregular expenditure outside the ambit, eg on an unauthorised service.
5.4.4 Parliament usually regards the latter as particularly unsatisfactory because it
means that the department concerned has flouted parliament's intentions'2 and
may have defective systems of control. The auditor may identify such excesses as
spending not covered by statutory powers, even if the total amount spent does not
exceed the voted limit.
5.4.5 Expenditure in excess of provision on an activity agreed by parliament is also
to be avoided since the authority of a Supply and Appropriation Act is just as
essential as specific statutory authority (box 2.1). It is possible, with Treasury
agreement, to raise the amount in an Estimate during the course of the year in a
Supplementary. But otherwise accounting officers should reduce, reprioritise or
postpone use of resources to keep within the provision parliament has agreed for
the year.
5.5 Commitments
5.5.1 Parliament is not bound!3 to honour ministers’ commitments unless and until
there are statutory powers to meet them and it authorises public funds to finance
them (through an Estimate) in a given year. This discipline is especially important
when ministers plan a new service.
5.5.2 Because commitments can evolve into spending, they should always be
scrutinised and appraised as stringently as proposals for consumption (box 4.8 may
help). Some departments may agree with the Treasury blanket authority for defined
and limited ranges of non-statutory commitments, eg indemnities for board
members and commitments taken on the normal course of business. All other non
statutory commitments are novel, contentious or repercussive, so Treasury approval
is always essential before they are undertaken
5.5.3 Public sector organisations should give parliament prompt and timely notice of
any significant new commitments, whether using existing statutory powers or to be
honoured through future legislation. Non statutory contingent liabilities (above a
specified threshold) should always be notified in this way. The process is set out in
annex 5.4.
12 le has breached the Concordat ~ see annex 2.3
13 Under the Concordat
34
POL-BSFF-0233694_0037
POL00413475
POL00413475
Box 5.1: contingent liabilities: notifying parliament
Parliament should be notified of uncertain liabilities in a meaningful way without
spurious accuracy. It is good practice to notify parliament if a previously notified liability
changes significantly, or can be clarified, eg if the timing can be firmed up.
If a contingent liability affects several departments but cannot confidently be allocated
among them, the relevant ministers should inform parliament in a pragmatic way. A
single statement may well suffice.
If, exceptionally, a new liability needs to remain confidential, the minister should inform
the chairs of the relevant select committee and the PAC; then inform parliament openly
when the need for confidentiality lifts.
Ministers should inform parliament if an ALB assumes a contingent liability which it
could not absorb within its own resources, since the risk ultimately lies with the sponsor
department's budget.
5.5.4 The general rule is to err on the side of caution in keeping parliament
informed of emerging contingent liabilities. It is impossible to generalise about every
possible set of circumstances but some guidance is in box 5.1.
5.6 Tax
5.6.1 Public sector organisations should not engage in, or connive at, tax evasion,
tax avoidance or tax planning. If a public sector organisation were to obtain
financial advantage by moderating the tax paid by a contractor, supplier or other
counterparty, it would usually mean that the Exchequer as a whole would be worse
off — thus conflicting with the accounting officer's duties (section 3.3). Thus artificial
tax avoidance schemes should normally be rejected. It should be standard practice
to consult HMRC'4 about transactions involving non-standard approaches to tax
before going ahead.
5.6.2 There is of course no problem with using tax advisers to help meet normal
legitimate requirements of carrying on public business. These include administration
of VAT, PAYE and NICs, where expert help can be useful and efficient.
5.6.3 Proposals to create new taxes in order to assign their proceeds to new
spending proposals are rarely acceptable. Decisions on tax are for Treasury ministers,
who are reluctant to compromise their future fiscal freedom to make decision
5.7 Public dividend capital
5.7.1 Certain public sector businesses, notably trading funds and certain Health
Trusts, are set up with public dividend capital (PDC) in lieu of equity. Like equity,
PDC should be serviced, though not necessarily at a constant rate
5.7.2 PDC is not a soft option. In view of the risk it carries, it should deliver a rate of
return comparable to commercial equity investments carrying a similar level of risk.
There is scope for the return to vary to reflect market conditions and investment
14 HMRC customer relationship manager or customer co-ordinator
35
POL-BSFF-0233694_0038
patterns; but persistent underperformance against the agreed rate of return should
not be tolerated.
5.7.3 A department needs specific statutory power to issue PDC, together with
supply cover to pay it out of the Consolidated Fund. Sometimes instead of a specific
issue of PDC, the legislation establishing (or financially reconstructing) a public
sector business deems an issue of PDC to the new business. Dividends on PDC, and
any repayments of PDC, are paid to the sponsor department of the business.
5.7.4 Further information about the use of PDC can be found in Consolidated
Budgeting guidance. 15
5.8 Borrowing by public sector organisations
5.8.1 Some public sector organisations, eg certain trading funds, are partly financed
through loans provided through the sponsor department's Estimate; or from the
National Loans Fund (NLF). In these cases Treasury consent and specific legal powers
are always required. Limits and other conditions are common. See annex 5.5 for
more.
5.8.2 NLF and Voted loans can only be made if there is reasonable expectation that
the loan will be serviced and repaid promptly. Similarly, when ALBs borrow, their
sponsor departments explicitly stand behind them and so should scrutinise
borrowers’ creditworthiness, not just relying on their track records, in order to satisfy
themselves that such loans are sound. For NLF loans, if timely repayment could not
realistically be expected, the loan would be unlawful.
5.8.3 Should a department become aware of concerns about the security of
outstanding loans (either its own or an ALB’s), it should warn the Treasury promptly
and consider what action it can take to reduce or otherwise mitigate any potential
loss. If a loan becomes irrecoverable, remedial treatment should be agreed with the
Treasury and then notified to parliament.
5.8.4 The NLF cannot make a loss. So the interest rates charged on NLF loans,
whether fixed or variable, must be higher than the rates at which the NLF could raise
funds for a similar period. Early repayment is sometimes possible, eg if the borrower
has windfall receipts, but never simply to refinance on terms more favourable to the
borrower because a fee is charged to match the Exchequer costs when a loan ends
early. This is because the NLF finances the amount outstanding using money market
instruments sold at the time the loan was made, and must continue to service those
instruments. So the Exchequer as a whole would make a loss if the NLF offered
cheaper replacement loans.
5.8.5 While NLF loans are repaid to the NLF, voted loans are repaid to the
Consolidated Fund. The treatment of repayments and interest payments in Estimates
and accounts is discussed in the Consolidated Budgeting Guidance, the Estimate
Manual and the FReM. The Treasury accounts for NLF transactions in the NLF’s
accounts. Any proposed write-offs must be notified to parliament after obtaining
Treasury agreement: see annex 5.5
15 httos: .gov.uk/government/oublications/consolidated-budgeting-quidance-2021-to-2022
36
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0039
5.9 External borrowing
5.9.1 Public sector organisations may borrow from private sector sources only if the
transaction delivers better value for money for the Exchequer as a whole. Because
non-government lenders face higher costs, in practice it is usually difficult to satisfy
this condition unless efficiency gains arise in the delivery of a project (eg PFI)
Treasury agreement to any such borrowing, including by ALBs, is also essential
Nevertheless it can sometimes be expedient for public sector bodies to borrow short
term, for example by overdraft.
5.9.2 When a sponsor department's ALB borrows, the department should normally
arrange to guarantee the loan to secure a fine rate. This is not always possible, eg
when a guarantee would rank as a state aid (see annex 4.7). A department which
guarantees a loan normally'é needs a specific statutory power as well as Estimate
provision. On exceptional occasions temporary non-statutory loans may be possible.
5.9.3 The case for a guarantee should be scrutinised as thoroughly as if indeed a
loan were made. Since guarantees always entail entering into contingent liabilities,
parliament must be notified when a loan guarantee is given, using the reporting
procedures in annex 5.4.
5.9.4 Occasionally there is a case for an ALB to borrow in foreign currency in its own
name rather than the government's. Because this can affect the credit standing of
the government as a sovereign borrower, and may well cost more, it is essential to
consult the Treasury beforehand. The same principles apply to the borrowing of any
bodies, such as subsidiaries, for which a department's ALBs are responsible.
5.10 Multiple sources of funding
5.10.1 Sometimes public sector organisations derive funding from more than one
source. Examples of funding other than voted funds include national insurance
contributions (which are dedicated to the National Insurance Fund), lottery funding
and charitable funding. All of these alternatives usually come with specific
conditions attached
5.10.2 Organisations in this position should segregate and account separately for
the different streams of funding so that they can apply the relevant terms and
conditions to each. In particular, where a source of funding is designated to a
particular purpose, it is rarely appropriate to use another instead. In those
circumstances switching is novel and contentious and thus requires Treasury
approval.
5.10.3 When there is doubt about how to handle multiple streams of funding, it is
good practice to consult the Treasury.
5.11 Cash management
5.11.1 The various organisations in central government together handle very large
flows of public funds. At the end of each working day, the Exchequer must either
borrow from the money market or place funds on deposit with the money market,
16 The Concordat applies here in just the same way as to spending ~ see annex 2.3
37
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0040
depending on the net position reached after balancing outflows to finance
expenditure against inflows from taxes and other sources.
5.11.2 So there is considerable advantage to be gained for the Exchequer as a
whole by minimising this net position. In practice this means gathering balances
together at the end of each working day. In aggregate all these accounts make up
the Exchequer Pyramid, managed by the Treasury. Most funds are held with the
Government Banking Service
5.11.3 It is essential for central government organisations to minimise the balances
in their own accounts with commercial banks. Were each to retain a significant sum
in its own account with such banks, the amount of net government borrowing
outstanding on any given day would be appreciably higher, adding to interest costs
and hence worsening the fiscal balance.
5.11.4 Each central government organisation should establish a policy for its use of
banking services. See annex 5.6 for guidance. Sponsor departments should also
make sure that their ALBs are aware of the importance of managing this aspect of
their business efficiently and effectively (see box 7.2).
5.12 Other financing techniques
5.12.1 Depending on its circumstances, purposes and risk profile, a public sector
organisation may consider using financial instruments provided by the commercial
markets. Among these techniques are foreign currency transactions and various
hedging instruments designed to control or limit business risks, for example those
arising out of known requirements for specific future purchases of market priced
commodities. Mundane possibilities are use of credit or debit cards, in order to
secure faster settlements.
5.12.2 As with making decisions about other policies and projects, an organisation
considering using unfamiliar financing techniques should evaluate them carefully,
especially to assess value for money. The checklists in boxes 4.5 and 4.6 have
reminders of factors that may need to be considered. As such transaction(s) are
almost always novel, contentious or repercussive, it is essential to consult the
Treasury.
5.12.3 Any organisation using a new or non-standard technique should ensure that
it has the competence to manage, control and track its use and any resulting
financial exposures, which may vary with time. In particular, departments should
consult the Treasury before using derivatives for the first time (and ALBs their
sponsoring departments).
5.12.4 When assessing an unfamiliar financing technique, it is important to
remember that providers of finance and complex financial instruments intend to
profit from their business. And providers’ costs of finance are always inferior to the
UK government's cost of borrowing. So it is usually right to be cautious about any
novel techniques. The Treasury will always refuse proposals to speculate. Offers
which appear too good to be true usually are.
5.12.5 As with managing other business, parliament may ask accounting officers to
justify any decisions about use of financial transactions, especially if with hindsight
they have not achieved good value for money.
38
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0041
POL00413475
POL00413475
Chapter 6
Fees, charges and levies
Charges for services provided by public sector organisations normally pass on the full cost of providing
them. There is scope for charging more or less than this provided that ministers choose to do so,
parliament consents and there is full disclosure. Public sector organisations may also supply
commercial services on commercial terms designed to work in fair competition with private sector
providers. Parliament expects proper controls over how, when and at what level charges may be
levied.
6.1.1 Certain public goods and services are financed by charges rather than from general
taxation. This can be a rational way to allocate resources because it signals to
consumers that public services have real economic costs. Charging can thus help
prevent waste through badly targeted consumption. It can also make comparisons
with private sector services easier, promote competition, develop markets and
generally promote financially sound behaviour in the public sector.
6.1.2 There are unavoidable reasons why policy on charging is important:
* charges substitute for taxation (or, in the short term, borrowing) as a
means of government finance. Decisions on charging policy should
therefore be made with the same care, and to similar standards, as
those on taxation;
* for this reason, parliament expects to consider legislation on whether
charges should be levied; how they should be structured; and on
charge levels;
+ international standards! determine how income from charges is
classified in the national accounts. Certain charges are treated as taxes.
6.1.3 As in other areas of managing public funds, parliament expects the Treasury
to make sure that its interests are respected, including pursuit of efficiency and
avoidance of waste or extravagance. Because Estimates and budgets are shown net
of income, special effort is required to give parliament information about both gross
and net costs, and about the sources and amounts of income.
6.2 Basic principle
6.2.1 The standard approach is to set charges to recover full costs. Cost should be
calculated on an accruals basis, including overheads, depreciation (eg for start up or
improvement costs) and the cost of capital. Annex 6.1 sets out how to do this.
1 The Treasury and public accounts follow classification decisions taken by the Office for National Statistics, an independent
organisation which is guided by the international standards set out in the European System of Accounts
39
POL-BSFF-0233694_0042
POL00413475
POL00413475
6.2.2 This approach is simply intended to make sure that the government neither
profits at the expense of consumers nor makes a loss for taxpayers to subsidise. It
requires honesty about the policy objectives and rigorous transparency in the public
interest.
6.2.3 As elsewhere, organisations supplying public services should always seek to
control their costs so that public money is used efficiently and effectively. The impact
of lower costs should normally be passed on to consumers in lower charges. Success
in reducing costs is no excuse for avoiding the principles in this guidance
6.2.4 This chapter applies to all fees and charges set by ministers and by an
extensive range of public bodies: departments, trading funds, NDPBs, the NHS, non-
devolved services in Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland, and most public
corporations. Departments should be able to satisfy themselves that their ALBs can
deliver the financial objectives for the services they charge for. This chapter also
applies when one public organisation supplies another with goods or services; and
to certain statutory local authority charges set by ministers.
6.3 Setting a charge: standard practice
6.3.1 When a charge for a public service is to be made, it is normally necessary to
rely on powers in primary legislation. The legislation should be designed so that
ministers decide, or have significant influence over, both the structure of the charge
and its level. It is common to frame primary legislation in general terms, using
secondary legislation to settle detail.
6.3.2 Treasury consent is required for all proposals to extend or vary charging
schemes. This holds even if the primary legislation does not call for it, or the
delegated authorities within which the organisation operates would otherwise allow
it.
6.3.3 It is sometimes possible to rely on secondary legislation rather than primary to
determine charges:
* an order under s56 of the Finance Act 1973;
* restructuring of charges can sometimes be achieved by an order under
5102 of the Finance (no 2) Act 1987 (see box 6.1).
Box 6.1: restructuring charges using S.102
* — As102 order can extend or vary powers in existing primary legislation.
* — It can permit restructuring by specifying factors to be taken into account when setting
fees.
* — Explicit prior Treasury consent is always essential.
But
* As102 order cannot create a power for new charges where no primary legislation
exists.
* Nor can it lift restrictions in (or in any other way undermine) primary legislation.
* Parliament is usually sceptical because s102 substitutes secondary for primary
legislation.
40
POL-BSFF-0233694_0043
POL00413475
POL00413475
6.3.4 When deciding the level of a charge, it is important to define:.
* the range(s) of services for which a charge is to be made;
* how any categories of service are to be differentiated, if at all, in setting
charges.
6.3.5 The standard approach is that the same charge should apply to all users of a
defined category of service, so recovering full costs for that category of service.
Different charges may be set for objectively different categories of service costing
different amounts to provide. Box 6.2 shows how this can work.
Box 6.2: how different charges can apply to different categories of service
Different categories could be recognised by:
* distinguishing supply differences, eg in person, by post or online
* priorities, eg where a quicker service costs more
* quality, eg charging more for a premium service with more features
* recognising structural differences, where it costs more to supply some consumers.
6.3.6 However, different groups of customers should not be charged different
amounts for a service costing the same, eg charging firms more than individuals.
Similarly, cross subsidies are not standard practice, eg charging large businesses
more than small ones where the cost of supply is the same.
6.3.7 Charges within and among central government organisations should normally
also be at full cost, including the standard cost of capital. Any different approach
would cause one party to make a profit or loss not planned in budgets agreed by
ministers collectively; while the customer organisation(s) would conversely face
charges higher or lower than full costs. A number of objectionable consequences
might flow from this. For instance, a question of state aid could arise; or private
sector consumers of the customer organisation might be charged distorted fees.
6.3.8 Shared services (box 6.3) are a special case of charging within the public
sector.
Box 6.3: shared services
It is often possible to make economies of scale by arranging for several public service organisations to
join together to deliver services cheaper, eg by using their joint purchasing power. One organisation
supplies the other(s). Since all the parties should lower their costs, the accounting officer of each
organisation should have no difficulty in recognising improved value for money for the Exchequer as a
whole and so justify going ahead.
Public sector organisations supplying (or improving) shared services should consult the Treasury at an
early stage of planning. Typically supplier organisations face the cost of setting up provision on a
larger scale than they need for their own use. As with setting up any new service, plans in budgets
should amortise initial costs so that they can be recovered over an appropriate period from the start of
the service. More detail on shared services is in section 7.5.
It is not acceptable for supplier organisations to plan to profit from, or subsidise, supply to customer
organisations in the public sector. Nor is it acceptable for accounting officers to resist shared services
just because the impact on their own organisation is not perceived to be favourable.
41
POL-BSFF-0233694_0044
6.4 Setting a charge: non-standard approaches
6.4.1 Ministers’ policy objectives for a service where a charge is levied may not fit
the standard model in section 6.3. In such cases it may be possible to deliver the
policy objective in another way. Some ways of doing this are described below.
Explicit Treasury consent, and often formal legal authority, is always required for
such variations. It is desirable to consult the Treasury at an early stage to make sure
that the intended strategy can be delivered.
Charging below cost
6.4.2 Where ministers decide to charge less than full cost, there should be an
agreed plan to achieve full cost recovery within a reasonable period. Each case
needs to be evaluated on its merits and obtain Treasury clearance. If the subsidy is
intended to last, this decision should be documented and periodically reconsidered
Charging above cost
6.4.3 ONS normally classifies charges higher than the cost of provision, or not
clearly related to a service to the charge payer, as taxes. Such charges always call for
explicit ministerial decision as well as specific statutory authority. The Treasury does
not automatically allow departments to budget for net expenditure associated with
above cost charges. Netting off, or netting off up to full costs, may be agreed in
certain instances, considering each case on its merits.
6.4.4 Sometimes when a change of this kind is classified as a tax, departments also
propose to assign its revenue. The Treasury always treat such proposals with caution
(see 5.6.3).
Cross subsidies
6.4.5 Cross subsidies always involve a mixture of overcharging and undercharging,
even if the net effect is to recover full costs for the service as a whole. So cross
subsidised charges are normally classified as taxes. They always call for explicit
ministerial decision and parliamentary approval through either primary legislation or
a s102 order.
Information services
6.4.6 In the public interest, information may be provided free or at low charge. This
approach recognises the value of helping the general public obtain the data they
require to function in the modern world. There are some exceptions - see annex 6.2
6.5 Levies
6.5.1 Compulsory levies, eg payments for licences awarded by statutory regulators,
or duties to finance industry specific research foundations, are normally classified as
taxation. Such levies may be justified in the wider public interest, not because they
provide a direct beneficial service to those who pay them. Depending on the
circumstances, the Treasury may allow regulators to retain the fees charged if this
approach is efficient and in the public interest.
6.5.2 As with other fees and charges, levies should be designed to recover full costs.
If the legislation permits, the charge can cover the costs of the statutory body, eg a
42
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0045
regulator could recover the cost of registration to provide a licence and of
associated supervision. It may be appropriate to charge different levies to different
kinds of licensees, depending on the cost of providing different kinds of licences (see
box 6.2).
6.6 Commercial services
6.6.1 Some public sector services are discretionary, ie no statute underpins them.
Services of this kind are often supplied into competitive markets, though sometimes
the public sector supplier has a monopoly or other natural advantage.
6.6.2 Charges for these services should be set at a commercial rate. The rate should
deliver a commercial return on the use of the public resources deployed in supplying
the service. So the financial target should be in line with market practice, using a risk
weighted rate of return on capital relevant to the sector concerned. The rate of
return used in pricing calculations for sales into commercial markets should be:
+ for sales into commercial markets, in line with competitors’ assessment
of their business risk, rising to higher rates for more risky activities; or
* where a public sector body supplies another, or operates in a market
without competitors, the standard rate for the cost of capital (see
annex 6.1)
6.6.3 If a publicly provided commercial service does not deliver its target rate of
return, outstanding deficits should be recovered, eg by adjusting charges. Any
objective short of achieving the target rate of return calls for ministerial agreement,
and should be cleared with the Treasury. But discretionary services should never
undermine the supplier organisation’s public duties, including its financial
objective(s)
6.6.4 It is important for public suppliers of commercial services to respect
competition law. Otherwise public services using resources acquired with public
funds might disturb or distort the fair operation of the market, especially where the
public sector provider might be in a dominant position: see annex 6.3
6.7 Disclosure
6.7.1 It is important that parliament is fully informed about use of charges. Each
year the annual report of the charging organisation should give:
+ the amounts charged
+ full costs and unit costs
* total income received
* the nature and extent of any subsidies and/or overcharging
* the financial objectives and how far they have been met.
6.7.2 To keep parliament properly informed, Estimates should display details of
expected income from charges. The Estimates Manual explains how the controls
work.
43
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0046
POL00413475
POL00413475
6.7.3 The FReM sets out the information public sector organisations should publish
in their accounts. It should include analysis of income.
6.8 Taking stock
6.8.1 As with any other use of public resources, it is important to monitor
performance so that the undertaking can be adjusted as necessary to stay on track.
It is good practice to review the service routinely at least once a year, to check, and
if appropriate revise, the charging level. At intervals, a more fundamental review is
usually appropriate, eg on a timetable compatible with the dynamics of the service.
Box 6.4 suggests some issues to examine.
Box 6.4: reviewing a public service for which a charge is made
¢ Is it still right for a public sector body to use public resources to supply the service?
* — Are there any related services for which there might be a case for charging?
* Does the business structure still make sense? Are the assets used for the service
adequate?
* — How can efficiency and effectiveness be improved so that charges can be lower or offer
better value?
* Is the financial objective right?
* — Fora statutory (or other public sector) service, if full costs are not recovered, why not?
* For a commercial service, does the target rate of return still reflect market rates?
* Is it still appropriate to net off against costs any agreed charges above cost?
* Is there scope to secure economies of scale by developing a shared service?
* What developments might change the business climate?
* Do any discretionary services remain a good fit for the business model and wider
objectives?
* Should any underused assets be redeployed, used to make a commercial return, or
sold?
* Would another business model (eg licensing, contracting out, privatising) be better?
44
POL-BSFF-0233694_0047
POL00413475
POL00413475
Chapter 7
Working with others
It often makes sense for public sector organisations to work with partners to deliver public services. This
chapter outlines how sponsor departments should keep track of their ALBs, and where necessary control
their activities. It is important that the public interest and the need to keep parliament informed are given
priority in setting up and operating these relationships.
7.1 The case for working in partnership
7.1.1 Public sector organisations may be able to deliver public services more
successfully if they work with another body. Central government departments may
find it advantageous to delegate certain functions to ALBs that can be free to
concentrate on them without conflict of interest. Or it may be helpful to harness the
expertise of a commercial or civil society sector organisation with skills and leverage
not available to the public sector.
7.1.2 Any such relationship inevitably entails tensions as well as opportunities. The
autonomy of each organisation needs to be buttressed by sufficient accountability
to give parliament and the public confidence that public resources are used wisely.
7.1.3 It can be important that an ALB is demonstrably independent. This in itself
does not determine the ALB’s form or structure. Independence is achieved by
specifying how the ALB is to operate. Functional independence is compatible with
financial oversight by the ALB’s parent department and with accountability.
7.1.4 It is generally helpful to deal with any potential conflicts head on by deciding
at the outset how the relationship(s) between the parties should work. The key
issues to tackle are set out in box 7.1.
Box 7.1: Issues for partnerships with public sector members
. The decision to engage with a partner should rest on evaluation of a business case assessed
against a number of alternatives, including doing nothing.
5 Conflicts of interest should be identified so that handling strategies can be agreed, eg by
establishing early warning processes or safeguards.
. The cultural fit of the partners should be close enough to give each confidence to trust the
other.
. Accountability for use of public funds should not be weakened.
The terms of engagement, including governance, should be documented in a framework agreement or
equivalent (see box 7.2).
7.2 Setting up new arm's length bodies
7.2.1 When a sponsor department sets up a new ALB, the nature of the new body
should be decided early in the process. It is sensible for the functions of the new
body to help determine this choice. Annex 7.1 offers advice and sources of guidance
on setting up a new ALB and compares the characteristics of agencies, non-
departmental public bodies (NDPBs) and non-ministerial departments (NMDs).
Departments should consult the Treasury and the Cabinet Office about making the
choice.
45
POL-BSFF-0233694_0048
7.2.2 In general, each new ALB should have a specific purpose, distinct from its
parent department. There should be clear perceived advantage in establishing a new
organisation, such as separating implementation from policy making; demonstrating
the integrity of independent assessment; establishing a specialist identity for a
professional skill; or introducing a measure of commercial discipline. It is sensible to
be sceptical about setting up a new ALB, since it will often add to costs.
7.2.3 ALBs cannot be given authority to make decisions proper to ministers, nor to
perform functions proper to sponsor departments. Only rarely is a non-ministerial
department the right choice as NMDs have limited accountability to parliament2.
Nor is it acceptable to use a royal charter to establish a public sector body since such
arrangements deny parliament control and accountability.
7.2.4A sponsor department cannot relinquish all responsibility for the business of
its ALBs by delegation. It should have oversight arrangements appropriate to the
importance, quality and range of the ALB’s business. Normally new, large,
experimental or innovative ALBs need more attention from the sponsor than
established or small ALBs doing familiar or low risk business. And the sponsor
department always needs sufficient reserve powers to reconstitute the management
of each ALB should events require it (see section 3.8). .
7.2.5 The sponsor department should plan carefully to make sure that its oversight
arrangements and the internal governance of any new ALB are designed to work
together harmoniously without unnecessary intrusion. The ALB also needs effective
internal controls and budgetary discipline so that it can live within its budget
allocation and deliver its objectives. And the sponsor department must have
sufficient assurance to be able to consolidate its ALBs’ accounts with its own
7.2.6 There is a good deal of flexibility about form and structure. It may be
expedient, for example, to set up an organisation which is eventually to be sold as a
Companies Act company. Or certain NDPBs may operate most effectively when
constituted as charities. Mutual structures can also be attractive. Innovation often
makes sense. The standard models are all capable of a good deal of customisation.
7.2.7 If the PAC decides to investigate an ALB, the accounting officers of both the
ALB and its sponsor department should expect to be called as witnesses. The PAC
will seek to be satisfied that the sponsor's oversight is adequate.
7.3 What to clarify
7.3.1 When documenting an agreement with a partner, public sector organisations
should analyse the relationship and consider how it might evolve. The framework
document (or equivalent) should then be kept up to date as the partnership
develops. Box 7.2 contains terms which should always be considered for inclusion.
The list is not exhaustive.
2 The sponsor deoartment also has less control as each NMD has its own budget, Estimate and annual accounts. So if a ministerial
department transfers work to an NMD, there is a greater risk of excess votes in each,
46
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0049
POL00413475
POL00413475
Box 7.2: framework terms for partnership agreements
purpose
* — The aims of the relationship and its working remit.
* — Its standards, key objectives and targets.
governance and accountability
* The legal relationship, including any financial or other limits.
* — Any statutory requirements relating to the functions of the partnership.
* The governance of any ALB: its board structure, how its members are appointed (and
disappointed). How the partnership should work, eg regular meetings of senior people.
* The extent to which any department is responsible to parliament for the conduct of a
partner (essential for partnerships between departments and ALBs).
* — Any other important features of the sponsorship role of the public sector partner, eg
acting as intelligent shareholder or consulting third parties.
* How any relationships with departments other than the sponsor should operate.
* — Any arrangements for regular reporting on performance to the public and/or
parliament.
* Plans for any evolution (eg into a mutual) after a period of ALB status.
+ Any arrangements for successor activity, eg establishing similar partnerships elsewhere.
decision making
* — How strategic decisions about the future of the partnership will be made, with
timetable, terms for intervention, break points, dispute resolution procedures,
termination process.
* — How the chain of responsibility should work, eg stewardship reporting, keeping track of
efficiency, risk assessment, project appraisal, management of interdependencies.
* — How the partnership will identify, manage and track opportunities and risks.
* — The status of the staff; and how they are to be hired, managed and remunerated.
* How any professional input (eg medical, scientific) is to be managed and quality
assured
* — Arrangements for taking stock of performance and learning lessons from it.
* — Arrangements for intervention when necessary.
financial management
* The financial relationship of the partners, eg:
- Any founding capital (including assets, goods, financial sums or other valuables)
- Any periodic grants and their terms
- How the partnership's corporate plan and annual target(s) are to be agreed
- How asset management and capital projects are to be decided and managed
- How cashflow is to be managed, and current expenditure financed
- The distribution of income and profit flows
- Any financial targets, eg Return on capital employed (roce)
- How any charges to customers or users are to be set
- Any agreed limits on the partnership’s business.
* Monitoring, financial reporting, regular liaison and any other tracking arrangements.
* — Internal and external audit arrangements, with any relevant accounts directions.
+ Arrangements for consolidation of accounts (essential for ALBs)
47
POL-BSFF-0233694_0050
7.3.2 In framing founding documentation, the partners should adopt a
proportionate approach. Parliament expects that public funds will be used in a way
that gives reasonable assurance that public resources will be used to deliver the
intended objectives.
7.3.3 In this process the aim should be to put the accounting officers of the parties
in a position to take a well informed view on the current status of the relationship,
enabling timely adjustments to be made as necessary. It is good practice to develop
structured arrangements for regular dialogue between the parties to avoid
misunderstandings and surprises.
7.3.4 Further advice about framework documents is in annex 7.2. It is important
that such documents fit the business to which they relate (rather than following
precedent or copying a standard model)
7.4 Agencies
7.4.1 Each agency is either part of a central government department or a
department in its own right. Agencies are intended to bring professionalism and
customer focus to the management and delivery of central government services,
operating with a degree of independence from the centre of their home
departments. Some are also trading funds (see section 7.8).
7.4.2 Each agency is established with a framework document on the lines sketched
out in box 7.2. With the exception of those agencies which are trading funds (see
section 7.8), they are normally funded through public expenditure supplied by
Estimates. Departments should consult the Treasury and Cabinet Office about the
preparation of their framework documents.
7.5 Departments working together
7.5.1 To promote better delivery and enhance efficiency, departments often find it
useful to work with other government departments (or ALBs). This can make sense
where responsibilities overlap, or both operate in the same geographical areas or
with the same client groups - arrangements loosely categorised as joined up
government. Such arrangements can offer opportunities for departments to reduce
costs overall while each partner plays to its strengths.
7.5.2 Such relationships can be constituted in a number of different ways. Some
models are sketched in box 7.3. The list is not exhaustive.
48
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0051
POL00413475
POL00413475
Box 7.3: examples of joined up activities in central government
* one partner can act as lead provider selling services (such as IT, HR, finance functions) to
other(s) as customers, operating under service level agreement(s)
* cost sharing arrangements for common services (eg in a single building), allocated in
line with an indicator such as numbers of staff employed or areas of office space
occupied
* joint procurement using a collaborative protocol
* a joint venture project with its own governance, eg an agency or wholly owned
company, selling services to a number of organisations, some or all of which may be
public sector
* an outsourced service, delivering to several public sector customers
7.5.3 Shared services often need funding to set up infrastructure, eg to procure IT.
This could be agreed in a spending review, or customers could buy in to the
partnership by transferring budget provision to the lead provider. Each of the
accounting officers involved should be satisfied that the project offers value for
money for the Exchequer as a whole. The provider's charges should be at cost,
following the standard fees and charges rules (see chapter 6).
7.5.4 In any joint activity, there must be a single accounting officer so that the lines
of responsibility are clear. If the PAC decides to investigate, the accounting officers
of each of the participants should expect to be summoned as witnesses.
7.6 Non-departmental public bodies
7.6.1 Non-departmental public bodies (NDPBs) may take a number of legal forms,
including corporates and charities. Most executive NDPBs have a bespoke structure
set out in legislation or its equivalent (eg a Royal Charter3). This may specify in some
detail what task(s) the NDPB is to perform, what its powers are, and how it should
be financed. Sometimes primary legislation contains powers for secondary
legislation to set or vary the detail of the NDPB’s structure. Annex 7.1 has links to
more about NDPBs
7.6.2 Each NDPB is a special purpose body charged with responsibility for part of
the process of government. Each has a sponsor department with general oversight
of its activity. The sponsor department's report and accounts consolidates its NDPBs’
financial performance.
7.6.3 NDPBs show considerable variety of structures and working methods, with
scope for innovation and customisation. Some NDPBs may also need to work with
other organisations as well as with their sponsor. All this should be documented in
the framework document (see annex 7.2).
7.6.4 NDPBs’ sources of finance vary according to their constitution and function.
Box 7.4 shows the main options available.
3 This route is no longer used - see Section 2.5.
49
POL-BSFF-0233694_0052
POL00413475
POL00413475
Box 7.4: sources of finance for NDPBs
* specific conditional grant(s) from the sponsor department (and/or other departments)
* general (less conditional) grant-in-aid from the sponsor department
* income from charges for any goods or services the NDPB may sell
* income from other dedicated sources, eg lottery funding
* public dividend capital
7.6.5 In practice NDPBs always operate with some independence and are not under
day-to-day ministerial control. Nevertheless, ministers are ultimately accountable to
parliament for NDPBs’ efficiency and effectiveness. This is because ministers: are
responsible for NDPBs’ founding legislation; have influence over NDPBs’ strategic
direction; (usually) appoint their boards; and retain the ultimate sanction of winding
up unsatisfactory NDPBs.
7.7 Public corporations
7.7.1 Some departments own controlling shareholdings in public corporations or
Companies Act companies, perhaps (but not necessarily) as a step toward disposal.
Public corporations’ powers are usually defined in statute; but otherwise all the
disciplines of corporate legislation apply. The Shareholder Executive, which
specialises in strategic management of corporates, may be a good way of managing
departments’ responsibilities as shareholders.
7.7.2 Sponsor departments should define any contractual relationship with a
corporate in a framework document adapted to suit the corporate context while
delivering public sector disciplines. The financial performance expected should give
the shareholder department a fair return on the public funds invested in the
business. Box 7.5 offers suggestions. This approach may also be appropriate for a
trading fund, especially if it is to become a Companies Act company in time
7.7.3 A shareholder department may also use a company it owns as a contractor or
supplier of goods or services. It is a good discipline to separate decisions about the
company’s commercial performance from its contractual commitments, so avoiding
confusion about objectives. So there should be clear arm’s length contracts between
the company and its customer departments defining the customer-supplier
relationship(s).
50
POL-BSFF-0233694_0053
POL00413475
POL00413475
Box 7.5: outline terms for a relationship with a public corporation
* the shareholder's strategic vision for the business, including the rationale for public
ownership and the public sector remit of the business
* the capital structure of the business and the agreed dividend regime, with suitable
incentives for business performance
* the business objectives the enterprise is expected to meet, balancing policy, customer,
shareholder and any regulatory interests
* the department’s rights and duties as shareholder, including:
- governance of the business
- procedure for appointments (and disappointments)
- financial and performance monitoring
- any necessary approvals processes
- the circumstances of, and rights upon, intervention
* details of any other relationships with any other parts of government
7.8 Trading funds
7.8.1 All trading funds are established under the Trading Funds Act 1973. Their
activities are not consolidated with their sponsor departments’ business. They must
finance their operations from trading activity.
7.8.2 Each trading fund is set up through an order subject to affirmative resolution.
Before an order can be laid in parliament, the Treasury needs to be satisfied that a
proposed trading fund can satisfy the statutory requirement that its business plan is
sustainable without additional funding in the medium term. A period of shadow
operation as a pilot trading fund may help inform this assessment.
7.8.3 Each trading fund must be financed primarily from its trading income. In
particular, each trading fund is expected to generate a financial return
commensurate with the risk of the business in which it is engaged. In practice this
means the target rate of return should be no lower than its cost of capital. The
actual return achieved may vary a little from one year to the next, reflecting the
market in which the trading fund operates.
7.8.4 The possible sources of capital for trading funds are shown in box 7.6. They
are designed to give trading funds freedom from the discipline of annual Estimate
funding. The actual mix for a given trading fund must be agreed with the sponsor
department (if there is one) and with the Treasury, subject to any agreed limits, eg
on borrowing.
7.8.5 Further detail about trading funds is in annex 7.3. Guidance on setting
charges for the goods and services trading funds sell is in chapter 6.
51
POL-BSFF-0233694_0054
POL00413475
POL00413475
Box 7.6: sources of capital for trading funds
* public dividend capital (equivalent to equity, bearing dividends - see annex 7.4)
* reserves built up from trading surpluses
* long or short term borrowing (either voted from a sponsor department or borrowed
from the National Loans Fund if the trading fund is a department in its own right)
* temporary subsidy from a sponsor department, voted in Estimates
* finance leases
7.9 Non-ministerial departments
7.9.1 A very few central government organisations are non-ministerial departments
(NMDs). It is important that there is some clear rationale for this status in each case.
7.9.2 NMDs do not answer directly to any government minister. They have their
own accounting officers, their own Estimates and annual reports, and settle their
budgets directly with the Treasury. However, some ministerial department must
maintain a watching brief over each NMD so that a minister of that department can
answer for the NMD’s business in parliament; and if necessary take action to adjust
the legislation under which it operates. A framework document should define such
a relationship.
7.9.3 This limited degree of parliamentary accountability must be carefully justified
It can be suitable for a public sector organisation with professional duties where
ministerial input would be inappropriate or detrimental to its integrity. But the need
for independence is rarely enough to justify NMD status. It is possible to craft
arrangements for NDPBs which confer robust independence. Where this is possible it
provides better parliamentary accountability, and so is to be preferred.
7.10 Local government
7.10.1 A number of central government departments make significant grants to
local authorities. Some of these are specific (ring fenced). Most are not, allowing
local authorities to set out their own priorities.
7.10.2 Nevertheless parliament expects assurances that such decentralised funds are
used appropriately, ie that they are spent with economy, efficiency and
effectiveness, and not wasted nor misused. The quality of the assurance available
differs from that expected of central government organisations because local
authorities’ prime accountability is to their electorates.
7.10.3 For these relationships a framework document is not usually the most fruitful
approach. Instead. Central government departments should draw up an annual
account of how their accounting officers assure themselves that grants to local
government are distributed and spent appropriately; and how underperformance
can be dealt with. This account forms part of the governance statement in the
report and accounts of each department affected (see annex 3.1).
7.10.4 Similar considerations apply to the NHS and centrally funded schools.
52
POL-BSFF-0233694_0055
7.11 Innovative structures
7.11.1 Sometimes central government departments have objectives which more
easily fit into bespoke structures suited to the business in hand, or to longer range
plans for the future of the business. Such structures might, for example, include
various types of mutual or partnership.
7.11.2 Proposals of this kind are by definition novel and thus require explicit
Treasury consent. In each case, proposals are judged on their merits against the
standard public sector principles after examining the alternatives, taking account of
any relevant experience. The Treasury will always need to understand why one of the
existing structures will not serve: eg the NDPB format has considerable elasticity in
practice. Boxes 4.8 and 7.2 may help with this analysis.
7.12 Outsourcing
7.12.1 Public sector organisations often find it satisfactory and cost effective to
outsource some services or functions rather than provide them internally. Candidates
have included cleaning, security, catering and IT support. A wider range of services
is potentially suitable for this treatment. Innovative approaches should be explored
constructively.
7.12.2 The first step in setting up any outsourcing agreement should be to specify
the service(s) to be provided and the length of contract to be sought. At that stage
it is usually desirable to draw up an outline business case to help evaluate whether
outsourcing makes financial and operational sense. Any decision to outsource
should then be made to achieve value for money for the Exchequer as a whole.
7.12.3 It is good practice to arrange some form of competition for all outsourcing,
as for other kinds of procurement. If services are likely to be required at short notice
- for example legal services for advice on opportunities, threats or other business
pressures which emerge with little warning - it is good practice to arrange a
competition to establish a standing panel of providers whose members can be called
upon to deal with rapidly emerging needs.
7.12.4 Contracting out does not dissolve responsibility. Public sector organisations
using a contractor should set in place systems to track and manage performance
under the contract. It may be appropriate to plan for penalties for disruption and/or
failure if the contractor cannot deliver. The PAC may need to be satisfied that the
arrangements for contracting out entail sufficient accountability for the use of public
funds.
7.13 Private finance
7.13.1 Where properly constructed and managed, public sector organisations can
use private finance arrangements to construct assets and/or deliver services with
good value for money. Structured arrangements where the private sector puts its
own funds at risk can help deliver projects on time and within budget.
7.13.2 It is important to carry out a rigorous value for money analysis to determine
whether these benefits are likely to exceed the additional cost of using private
finance. Contracting organisations should also make sure that they are able to
afford such arrangements over their working lifetimes, taking account, as far
53
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0056
POL00413475
POL00413475
as possible, of the risk of difficult future financial environments. It is not
good practice to embark on a private finance arrangement if it is dependent
on other separate financial transactions taking place during the project's
lifetime
7.13.3 Procurement using private finance is a flexible, versatile and often effective
technique, so it should be considered carefully as a procurement option. Contracts
should normally be built up using standard terms and guidance published by the
Treasury (see Annex 7.4). Departure from standard guidance needs to be approved
by the Treasury.
7.14 Commercial activity
7.14.1 When public bodies have assets which are not fully used but are to be
retained, it is good practice to consider exploiting the spare capacity to generate a
commercial return in the public interest. This is essentially part of good asset
management.
7.14.2 Any kind of public sector asset can and should be considered. Candidates
include both physical and intangible assets, for example land, buildings, equipment,
software and intellectual property (see annex 4.15). A great variety of business
models is possible.
7.14.3 Such commercial services always go beyond the public sector supplier's core
duties. Because these assets concerned have been acquired with public funds, it is
important that services are priced fairly: see chapter 6. It is also important to respect
the rules on state aids: see annex 4.7. Central government organisations should
work through the checklist at box 7.7.
Box 7.7: planning commercial exploitation of existing assets
* define the service to be provided
* — establish that any necessary vires and (if necessary) Estimate provision exist
* — identify any prospective business partners and run a selection process
* if the proposed activity is novel, contentious, or likely to set a precedent elsewhere,
obtain Treasury approval
* — take account of the normal requirements for propriety, regularity and value for money
7.14.4 While it makes sense to make full use of assets acquired with public
resources, such activity should not squeeze out, or risk damaging, a public sector
organisation’s main objectives and activities. Similarly, it is not acceptable to acquire
assets just for the purpose of engaging in, or extending, commercial activity. If a
public sector supplier's commercial activity demands further investment to keep it
viable, reappraisal is usually appropriate. This should consider alternatives such as
selling the business, licensing it, bringing in private sector capital, or seeking other
way(s) of exploiting the underused potential in the assets or business.
7.14.5 It is a matter of judgement when departments should inform parliament of
the existence, or growth, of significant commercial ventures. It is good practice to
consult the Treasury in good time on this point so that parliament can be kept
properly informed and not misled.
54
POL-BSFF-0233694_0057
POL00413475
POL00413475
7.15 Working with civil society bodies
7.15.1 Central government organisations may find they can deliver their objectives
effectively through relationships with civil society bodies: ie charities, social,
voluntary or community institutions, mutual organisation, social enterprises or other
not-for-profit organisations. Such partnerships can achieve more than either the
public or the civil society sector can deliver alone. For example, using a civil society
sector organisation can provide better insight into demand for, and suitable means
of delivery of public services.
7.15.2 It is good practice to plan relationships with civil society partners through a
framework document, as with other partnerships. Some guidelines on how these
relationships can work well in harmony with policy and spending decisions are in the
Civil Society Compact?.
7.15.3 In this kind of relationship a public sector organisation may fund activities,
make grants, lend assets, or arrange other transfers to a civil society sector body
performing or facilitating delivery of services. It is desirable to build in safeguards to
ensure that resources are used as intended (see annex 5.2). This gives parliament
confidence that voted resources are used for the purposes it has approved.
7.15.4 The safeguards to be applied should be agreed at the start of the
relationship. Customisation in nearly always essential. It is often right to require
clawback, ie to agree terms in which public sector donors reclaim the proceeds if
former publicly owned assets are sold
4 https: .gov. uk/government/publications/compact-the-agreement-between-government-and-the-voluntary-community-sector
55
POL-BSFF-0233694_0058
Annex 1.1
The Comptroller and Auditor
General
POL00413475
POL00413475
of access to records, the C&AG provides direct advice and assurance to Parliament.
Supported by staff of the National Audit Office (NAO), the Comptroller and Auditor General (C&AG) is
the independent auditor of nearly all central government institutions. Using extensive statutory rights
A1.1.1 The C&AG is an officer of the House of Commons appointed by The Queen
They are responsible for the audit of most central government institutions. This work
is carried out under his or her direction by NAO staff (see www.nao.org.uk) or by
contracting out. NAO is in the public sector but independent of central government.
A1.1.2 The C&AG is appointed for a single non-renewable term of ten years; and
can only be removed from office by The Queen on an address of both Houses of
Parliament. The NAO’s statutory board advises and supports the C&AG — for
example, on the NAO’s strategic direction and the associated resource requirements.
Audit related decisions such as which examinations to perform and the specific audit
and reporting approach, are matters solely for the independent C&AG to decide.
A1.1.3 The NAO is financed by an Estimate submitted jointly by the C&AG and the
NAO chair to the Public Accounts Commission (TPAC), a committee of the House of
Commons. NAO’s expenditure may include discretionary activities permitted under
statute if approved by NAO’s board and subsequently by TPAC through its scrutiny
of the NAO’s Estimate.
Audit
A1.1.4 In order to carry out financial audit work, the C&AG has extensive statutory
rights of access to information held by a wide range of public sector organisations.
This material is also required to compile Whole of Government Accounts, and
extends to the records of many contractors and recipients of grants. The C&AG also
has a right to obtain information about, and explanations of, any of this evidence.
A1.1.5 The C&AG is responsible for the financial audit of virtually all central
government organisations, providing an audit opinion on their annual financial and
reporting to Parliament. The C&AG may be appointed the auditor of government
companies as a requirement of statute or on an ‘agreement’ basis with an individual
entity as necessary. Financial audits are carried out in accordance with International
Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland).
A1.1.6 In addition, the C&AG may carry out audits of particular areas of central
government expenditure to establish whether public funds have been used
economically, efficiently and effectively. Selection of these value for money (vfm)
examinations - having taken account of any proposals made by the Committee of
56
POL-BSFF-0233694_0059
Public Accounts - is entirely at the C&AG's discretion, as is the manner in which they
are carried out and reported. The C&AG has the same level of access for vim
examinations as for financial audit. Central government bodies must ensure that
such access is provided for within the terms and conditions of contracts and
agreements with third party contractors, sub-contractors and grant recipients.
A1.1.7 In the event of the C&AG requiring access to sensitive documents to inform
his work — for example, policy papers such as Cabinet, or Cabinet Committee, papers
— then public sector organisations should cooperate with NAO requests for access to
such information, irrespective of its classification or other sensitivity. It is important
to work closely with NAO to explain fully any publication sensitivities that may exist.
While the final decision about the contents of his or her reports must rest with the
C&AG, such close working ensures sensitivities can be properly taken into account as
the report content is finalised
A1.1.8 The Public Accounts Committee (PAC) may decide to invite witnesses to
discuss the findings of-both financial audits and vim examinations. The PAC may
also initiate other hearings on related matters.
The Comptroller function
A1.1.9 An important part of the C&AG's responsibilities is oversight of payments
from the Consolidated Fund and the National Loans Fund. In response to requests
from the Treasury, NAO staff establish that the sums paid out of these funds each
business day are made in accordance with legislation. Once the authorisations
(credits) are given, the Treasury may make drawings from these funds to finance the
Exchequer’s commitments.
57
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0060
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 2.1
Treasury approval of legislation
This annex sets out how departments should clear proposed legislation with the Treasury where there
are financial implications, either for expenditure or raising revenue. More detailed guidance on the
preparation of legislation and the legislative process should be sought from departmental
parliamentary clerks.
Consulting the Treasury
A2.1.1 When preparing legislation, departments must consult the Treasury:
e before any proposals for legislation with financial implications are
submitted to ministers collectively for policy approval;
about any provisions included in legislation with financial and public
service manpower implications;
* on the terms of Money Resolutions and Explanatory Notes; and
subsequently about any changes that are proposed to the agreed
financial provisions, eg during the legislation’s passage through
Parliament.
A2.1.2 Departments should make sure that they achieve Treasury agreement early in
the process and in any event before drafting instructions to Parliamentary Counsel
are prepared.
Treasury consent
A2.1.3 All legislation with a financial dimension should provide for specific Treasury
consents to any key changes in the implementation of the powers it contains.
Examples of such triggers, all requiring ministerial decisions, are in box A2.1A.
Treasury consent is required to protect the authority of the Chancellor of the
Exchequer in matters of finance or establishment.
A2.1.4 In principle, the Chancellor's authority is protected by:
e — the doctrine of the collective responsibility of ministers;
e the need for Treasury approval of Estimates before they are presented
to Parliament and before resources consumed or expenditure incurred
can be charged on the Consolidated Fund;
but providing for statutory consent avoids any danger that the Chancellor might be
committed to legislation he or she would not have agreed
58
POL-BSFF-0233694_0061
POL00413475
POL00413475
Money resolutions
A2.1.5 A money resolution is required’ for legislation which creates a charge upon
public funds, either by way of new resource expenditure or by remission of debt.
Further advice on money resolutions should be sought from Parliamentary Clerks.
A2.1.6 The responsible department should clear the draft with the Treasury at
official level. When agreed, the Treasury will arrange for a copy initialled by the
Financial Secretary to be returned to Counsel.
Box A2.1A: examples of legislation matters which require explicit Treasury approval
* asa direct charge (a Consolidated Fund standing service), or
* indirectly, ie “out of monies to be provided by Parliament” (through Estimates):
- expenditure proposals affecting public expenditure as defined in the current public expenditure
planning total, eg rates of grant
- contingent liabilities, including powers to issue indemnities or to give guarantees
- loans taken from the National Loans Fund (NLF)- provisions for writing off NLF debt
- use of public dividend capital (PDC)- provisions involving the assets and liabilities of the CF and
NLF- borrowing powers
- fees and charges, including changes in coverage
- the form of government accounts and associated audit requirements
- public service manpower
- pay and conditions (eg superannuation and early severance terms) of civil servants pay and
conditions of board members of statutory organisations
- creation of (or alteration to) new statutory bodies and related financial arrangements
- provisions affecting grant recipients, including grants in aid
- provisions on audit usually giving the C&AG right of access
Ways and Means resolutions
A2.1.7 A ways and means resolution is required in the House of Commons where
legislation directs the payment of money raised from the public to the Consolidated
Fund (this technically constitutes the raising of money for the Crown to spend).
Some legislation may require both a money resolution and a ways and means
resolution.
A2.1.8 Departments should clear ways and means resolutions with the Treasury.
Further advice should be sought from parliamentary clerks
Explanatory Notes
A2.1.9 Except for finance, consolidation and tax law rewrite bills, departments
should prepare explanatory notes for all government bills. The main items to be
covered are set out in box A2.1B, Guidance on preparation is on the Cabinet Office
website2.
1 By virtue of Standing Order 49 of the House of Commons
2 https: gov.uk/government/publications/quide-to-making-legislation
59
POL-BSFF-0233694_0062
POL00413475
POL00413475
Box A2.1B: Legislation authorising expenditure: explanatory notes
1, Financial effects of the legislation:
* — Estimates of expenditure expected to fall on
- the Consolidated Fund (CF), distinguishing between Consolidated Fund standing
services and
- charges to be met from Supply Estimates; or the National Loans Fund (NLF)
* Estimates of any other financial consequences for total public expenditure (i.e. in
addition to costs which would fall on the CF or NLF) as defined in the current public-
expenditure planning total;
* Estimates of any effects on local government expenditure
2. Effects of the legislation on public service manpower:
* — Forecasts of any changes (or postponement of changes) to staff numbers in
government departments expected to result from the legislation;
* Forecasts of the likely effects to other public service manpower levels, for example in
non-departmental public bodies and local authorities.
60
POL-BSFF-0233694_0063
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 2.2
Delegated authorities
This annex expands on the requirement for departments to obtain Treasury consent to their public
expenditure and the process of delegated authorities.
A2.2.1 Treasury approval for expenditure is one aspect of the convention that Parliament
expects the Treasury to control all other departments in matters of finance and
public expenditure. Accounting officers are responsible (see first bullet of paragraph
3.3.3) for ensuring that prior Treasury approval is obtained in all cases where it is
needed.
A2.2.2 The need for Treasury approval embraces all the ways in which departments
might make public commitments to expenditure, not just Estimates or legislation,
important as they are. Box A2.2A identifies the main ways in which the need can
arise. It may not be exhaustive.
A2.2.3 Treasury approval:
must be confirmed in writing, even where initially given orally;
cannot be implied in the absence of a reply;
must be sought in good time to allow reasonable consideration before
decisions are required
A2.2.4 Departmental ministers should be made aware when Treasury consent is
required in addition to their own
Box A2.2A: where Treasury approval is required
* public statements or other commitments to use of public resources beyond the agreed
budget plans
* guarantees, indemnities or letters of comfort creating contingent liabilities
* any proposals outside the department's delegated limits
* all expenditure which is novel, contentious or repercussive, irrespective of size, even if it
appears to offer value for money taken in isolation
* — where legislation requires it
* — fees and charges
Where Treasury approval has been overlooked, the case should immediately be brought to
the Treasury's attention.
61
POL-BSFF-0233694_0064
Delegation
A2.2.5 Formally, Treasury consent is required for all expenditure or resource
commitments. In practice, the Treasury delegates to departments’ authority to enter
into commitments and to spend within predefined limits without specific prior
approval from the Treasury (but see A.2.2.12 for exceptions). Delegated authorities
may also allow departments to enter into commitments to spend (eg contingent
liabilities) and to deal with special transactions (such as some write-offs) without
prior approval.
A2.2.6 Such delegated authorities strike a balance between the Treasury's need for
control in order to fulfil its responsibilities to Parliament and the department's
freedom to manage within its agreed budget limits and Parliamentary provision.
A2.2.7 Departments should not take general Treasury approval of an Estimate as
approval for specific proposals outside delegated limits even if provision for them is
included in the Estimate.
A2.2.8 The Treasury may also work through the Cabinet Office to set certain
expenditure controls applicable across central government.
Setting delegated authorities
A2.2.9 While the standard terms for inclusion in delegated authorities are set out in
box A2.2B, HMT has produced a single template delegation letter which must be
used to set delegated limits for central government departments and ALBs.
Departments should appreciate that delegated authorities for certain kinds of
expenditure can be modified or removed entirely if the Treasury is not satisfied that
the department is using them responsibly
A2.2.10 In establishing delegated authorities, the Treasury will:
* — agree with the department how it will take spending decisions (e.g
criteria and/or techniques for investment appraisal, project
management and later evaluation);
e — establish a mechanism for checking the quality of the department's
decision-taking (e.g. by reviewing cases above a specified limit, or
giving full delegation but requiring a schedule of completed cases of
which a sample may be examined subsequently); and
*® encourage delegation of authority within the department to promote
effective financial management. In general, authority should be
delegated to the point where decisions can be taken most efficiently. It
is for the accounting officer to determine how authority should be
delegated to individual managers.
POL00413475
POL00413475
Box A2.2B: standard terms for delegated authorities
* aclear description of each item delegated
1 https yAmww.gov.uk/government/collections/cabinet-office-controls
62
POL-BSFF-0233694_0065
POL00413475
POL00413475
* the extent of each delegation, usually in financial terms, but potentially also in
qualitative terms, eg all items of a certain kind to require approval
* any relevant authorities, eg the enabling legislation or letter from a Treasury minister
* the relevant budget provision
* the relevant section of the department's Estimate
* — any effective dates
* arrangements for review. HMT requires that delegated authority limits be reviewed
annually.
A2.2.11 In turn departments should agree delegated authorities with their arm’s
length bodies, making use of the template delegated authority letter. Delegations to
ALBs should be no greater than departments’ own delegated authorities.
Departments must seek HMT approval for the delegated authorities they agree with
their ALBs.
A2.2.12 There are some areas of expenditure and resource commitments which the
Treasury cannot delegate: see box A.2.2C.
Box A2.2C: where authority is never delegated
* items which are novel, contentious or repercussive, even if within delegated limits
* items which could exceed the agreed budget and Estimate limits
* contractual commitments to significant spending in future years for which plans have
not been set
* items requiring primary legislation (eg to write off NLF debt or PDC)
* any item which could set a potentially expensive precedent
* where Treasury consent is a specific requirement of legislation
A2.2.13 Strictly, the Treasury cannot delegate its power of approval where there is a
statutory requirement for Treasury approval. But in practice it can be acceptable to
set detailed and objective criteria where Treasury approval can be deemed without
specific examination of each case. This may be appropriate to avoid a great deal of
detailed case-by-case assessment. The Treasury may ask for intermittent sampling to
check that this arrangement is operating satisfactorily.
Failure to obtain Treasury authority
A2.2.14 All expenditure which falls outside a department's delegated authority and
has not been approved by the Treasury, is irregular. It cannot be charged to
departmental Estimates. Similarly, any resources committed or expenditure incurred
in breach of a condition attached to Treasury approval is irregular.
A2.2.15 Where resource consumption or expenditure is irregular, the Treasury may
be prepared to give retrospective approval if it is satisfied that:
e it would have granted approval had it been approached properly in the
first place; and
e the department is taking steps to ensure that there is no recurrence.
63
POL-BSFF-0233694_0066
POL00413475
POL00413475
Requests for retrospective approval should follow the same format as requests
submitted on time.
A2.2.16 If the Treasury does not give retrospective approval or authorise write-off of
irregular expenditure, the department must inform the NAO. The Treasury may also
draw the matter to the attention of the responsible accounting officer. The C&AG
may then qualify his or her opinion on the account and the PAC may decide to hold
an oral hearing. In the case of voted expenditure, the Treasury will present an excess
vote to Parliament to regularise the situation
A2.2.17 It is unlawful to commit resources or incur expenditure without Treasury
consent, where such consent is required by statute. In such cases retrospective
consent cannot confer legality. Such consumption cannot, therefore, be regularised.
A2.2.18 In cases of unlawful expenditure, the responsible accounting officer must
note the department's accounts accordingly and notify the NAO. It will then be for
the C&AG to decide whether to report on the matter to Parliament with the relevant
accounts and whether to draw it to the attention of the PAC.
A2.2.19 The C&AG and the Treasury cooperate closely on questions of authority for
expenditure. The C&AG may bring a department's attention to any cases where the
department:
e has ignored or wrongly interpreted a Treasury ruling;
e — is attempting to rely on a mistaken delegated authority, eg where the
delegation has been changed or where consent was given orally only;
«has committed resources or incurred expenditure which the Treasury
might not have approved had it been consulted.
A2.2.20 Departments should bring such cases to the attention of the Treasury,
indicating clearly the NAO interest. The Treasury and NAO keep each other in touch
with such cases.
64
POL-BSFF-0233694_0067
Annex 2.3
PAC Concordat of 1932
2.3.1 The PAC has had long standing concerns about how the government gains authority
from Parliament for each area of spending
A2.3.2 In the mid 19th century it became customary for governments to gain
Parliamentary authority for some areas of expenditure simply by use of the
Contingencies Fund, without troubling to obtain specific powers for them. Shortly
after its formation in 1862, the PAC protested about this practice, partly because it
involved less stringent audit. It urged that the Contingencies Fund should be used
only for in-year funding of pressing needs, and that all continuing and other
substantive spending should be submitted to the Estimates process with due
itemisation.
A2.3.3 By 1885 the PAC had become concerned that the authority of the Estimate
and its successor Appropriation Act was not really sufficient either:
“.. cannot accept the view in a legal, still less in a financial, sense that the
distinct terms of an Act of Parliament may be properly overridden by a
Supplementary Estimate supported by the Appropriation Act ... this matter
... is one of great importance from a constitutional point of view ...”
A2.3.4 While the Treasury agreed in principle, the practice did not die out because
in 1908 the PAC again complained:
“while it is undoubtedly within the discretion of Parliament to override
the provisions of an existing statute by a vote in Supply confirmed by the
Appropriation Act, it is desirable in the interests of financial regularity and
constitutional consistency that such a procedure should be resorted to as
rarely as possible, and only to meet a temporary emergency”
A2.3.5 The PAC reverted to the issue in 1930 and again in 1932, citing a number of
cases involving various departments. It was concerned to specify how far an annual
Appropriation Act could be regarded as sufficient authority for the exercise of
functions by a government department in cases where no other specific statutory
authority exists. It took the view that:
”.. where it is desired that continuing functions should be exercised by a
government department, particularly where such functions may involve
financial liabilities extending beyond a given financial year, it is proper,
subject to certain recognised exceptions, that the powers and duties to be
exercised should be defined by specific statute”.
A2.3.6 In reply, the Treasury Minute said:
65
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0068
POL00413475
POL00413475
“ .. while it is competent to Parliament, by means of an annual vote
embodied in the Appropriation Acts, in effect to extend powers specifically
limited by statute, constitutional propriety requires that such extensions
should be regularised at the earliest possible date by amending legislation,
unless they are of a purely emergency or non-continuing character”.
”... while ... the Executive Government must continue to be allowed a
certain measure of discretion in asking Parliament to exercise a power which
undoubtedly belongs to it, they agree that practice should normally accord
with the view expressed by the Committee that, where it is desired that
continuing functions should be exercised by a government department
(particularly where such functions involve financial liabilities extending
beyond a given year) it is proper that the powers and duties to be exercised
should be defined by specific statute. The Treasury will, for their part,
continue to aim at the observance of this principle”
A2.3.7 With this Concordat, the matter still lies.
A2.3.8 Use of the Supply and Appropriation Acts as authority for expenditure is
discussed in annex 2.4
66
POL-BSFF-0233694_0069
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 2.4
New services
A2.4.1 Chapter 2 (box 2.1) sets out the essential conditions for authorisation of public
spending. New services are exceptions, ie services for which parliament would
normally expect to provide authorising legislation but has not yet done so. They can
include altering the way in which an existing service is delivered as well as services
not previously delivered.
When the Supply and Appropriation Act suffices
A2.4.2 Notwithstanding the general rules ion box 2.1, in some circumstances it is
not necessary to have specific enabling legislation in place. Parliament accepts that
agreement to the Estimate’ is sufficient authority for the kinds of expenditure listed
in boxes 2.5 or 2.6. The content of these boxes is reproduced in box A2.4A. They
can all be considered part of business as usual.
Box A2.4A: Expenditure parliament accepts may rest on a Supply and Appropriations Act
* routine administration costs: employment costs, rent, cleaning etc;
* — lease agreements, eg for photocopiers;
* expenditure using prerogative powers, notably defence of the realm and international
treaty obligations;
* temporary services or continuing services of low cost, provided that there is no specific
legislation covering these matters before parliament and existing statutory restrictions are
respected, specifically
© _ initiatives lasting no more than two years, eg a pilot study or one off intervention; or
© expenditure of no more than £1.75m a year (amount adjusted from time to time).
A2.4.3 It is important not to exceed these limits. The Treasury has agreed in the
Concordat (see annex 2.3) to seek to make sure they are respected. So departments
should consult the Treasury before relying upon them.
Anticipating a bill
A2.4.4 In addition, parliament is prepared to accept that departments may
undertake certain preparatory work while a bill is under consideration and before
royal assent. Examples are listed in box A2.4B.
1 Which becomes a Suoply and Appropriation Act once it has been through its parliamentary stages
67
POL-BSFF-0233694_0070
POL00413475
POL00413475
Box A2.4B: expenditure that can be incurred before royal assent
* pilot studies informing the choice of the policy option (because this process is part of
designing, modifying or even deciding to abandon the policy);
* scoping studies designed to identify in detail the implications of a proposal in terms of
staff numbers, accommodation costs and other expenditure to inform the legislative
process;
¢ _ in-house project teams and/or project management boards;
* use of private sector consultants to help identify the chosen policy option, assist with
scoping studies or other work informing the legislative process;
* — work on the legislative process associated with the new service.
A2.4.5 Departments may be able to finance activities such as those in box A2.4B out
of their existing resources. When this happens, departments should make sure that
the ambit? of the relevant Estimate covers the planned expenditure
A2.4.6 It is also important to understand in which areas of new business parliament
does expect the normal rigour for authorisation (box 2.1) to apply. For the
avoidance of doubt, some examples are shown in box A2.4C.
Box A2.4C: expenditure which may not normally incurred before royal assent
* — significant work associated with preparing for or implementing the new task enabled by
a bill, eg renting offices hiring expert consultants or designing or purchasing significant
IT equipment;
* recruitment of chief executives and board members of a new public sector organisation;
* recruitment of staff for a new public sector organisation
Providing for a new service
A2.4.7 Some new services go well beyond the examples in box A2.4B. They include
such things as paying a new grant, providing a new registration service,
transforming the delivery of existing service or setting up a new public sector
organisation. Even if a bill providing for a new service is before parliament, the
activity the bill provides for cannot normally go ahead before royal assent. It is
therefore good practice to plan the timetable for achieving the new service so that it
is compatible with the bill timetable:
A2.4.8 Sometimes it is convenient to use a paving bill to provide the necessary
powers to get a new service under way quickly. A paving bill can provide powers to
allow expenditure which would be nugatory if the subsequent detailed legislation
for the new service does not proceed, eg employing consultants to design a
significant IT or regulatory system. Paving bills are usually short, though they may be
contentious (and time consuming) as they can prompt parliamentary discussion of
the underlying substance of the measure.
2 See paragraph 3.9 of the Estimates’ Manual
68
POL-BSFF-0233694_0071
POL00413475
POL00413475
2.4.9 Departments which do not use paving bills may want to make an early start
on legislation contained in a bill during its passage through parliament. Usually the
spending in question lacks both adequate statutory underpinning and authorisation
in Estimates.
A2.4.10 In these circumstances there is a risk that allowing the spending to proceed
might be wasteful if royal assent is not achieve as expected. So it is good practice to
try to find other ways of making progress with the policy without anticipating royal
assent.
A2.4.11 If, nevertheless. a department wants to spend early on matters to be
empowered by a bill before parliament, it may make a claim for an advance from
the Contingencies Fund with a plan to repay it out of the next Estimate when
agreeds. The spending must meet the conditions in box A2.4D.
Box A2.4D: Criteria for drawings on the Contingencies Fund
* the bill in question must have reached second reading in the Commons; and
* the bill must be virtually certain to achieve royal assent with minimal change, preferably
within a year; and
* genuine urgency in the public interest, ie where postponing expenditure until after royal
assent would:
* cause additional wasteful expenditure or
* lose (not just defer) efficiency savings; or
* cause other damage or public detriment.
A2.4.12 The Treasury judges applications for access to the Contingencies Fund
cautiously and on their merits. It is important to note that neither political
imperative nor ministerial preference is relevant to making this assessment.
A2.4.13 In rare circumstances a Contingencies Fund advance may be awarded to
make senior appointments to a new public sector body being set up under a bill.
When this is allowed, the people appointed must be clear that if for any reason the
legislation fails, the provisional appointments would have to be cancelled
Notifying parliament
A2.4.14 The instances described in this annex all mean that parliament has less
control over certain items of public expenditure than it would normally expect.
Departments should therefore take great care to keep parliament informed of what
is happening and why.
A2.4.15 A timely written ministerial statement giving the amounts involved and
their timing is the essential minimum before Contingencies Fund resources can be
released. If possible an oral explanation at second reading, or a separate oral
statement, is desirable. In addition there should be:
* notes in the explanatory memorandum and impact assessment to the
relevant bill; and
3 See section 5.8 ofthe Estimates Manual
69
POL-BSFF-0233694_0072
* notes in the relevant Estimate - especially important if a department
wants to anticipate secondary legislation which a bill will empower.
A2.4.16 If the effect of the measure changes significantly, parliament should be
given timely information to keep it abreast of developments.
A2.4.17 It is good practice to keep the Treasury informed of the disclosure intended
The Treasury pulls all information about anticipation of parliamentary agreement
together and publishes it annually at the close of each session.
Directions
A2.4.18 The exceptions in this annex to the requirements of box 2.1 provide a lot of
scope for pragmatic progress of essential government business. The advice in this
annex may be regarded as judicious extensions of the requirements of propriety, and
acceptable only if parliament is not misled.
A2.4.19 But sometimes even these easements are not enough. If the Accounting
Officer is unable to design the minister's policy to fit within the standards in this
annex, he or she will need to seek a ministerial direction (see section 3.4). The usual
rules about disclosure of course apply.
70
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0073
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 3.1
The Governance Statement
It is fundamental to each accounting officer's responsibilities to manage and control the resources
used in his or her organisation. The governance statement, a key feature of the organisation's annual
report and accounts, manifests how these duties have been carried out in the course of the year. It
has three components: corporate governance, risk management and, in the case of some
departments, oversight of certain local responsibilities.
Purpose
3.1.1 Each accounting officer (AO) delegates responsibilities within his or her organisation
so as to control its business and meet the standards set out in box 3.1 (see chapter
3). The systems used to do this should give adequate insight into the business of the
organisation and its use of resources to allow the AO to make informed decisions
about progress against business plans and if necessary steer performance back on
track. In doing this the AO is usually supported by a board.
A3.1.2 These responsibilities are central to the AO’s duties. To carry them out the
AO needs to develop a keen sense of the risks and opportunities the organisation
faces. In the light of the board’s assessment of the organisation’s appetite for risk,
the AO needs to decide how to respond to the evolving perceived risks.
A3.1.3 The governance statement, for which the AO takes personal responsibility,
brings together all these judgements about use of public resources as part of the
annual report and accounts. It should give the reader a clear understanding of the
dynamics and control structure of the business. Essentially, it records the
stewardship of the organisation. Supplementing the accounts, it should provide a
sense of the organisation's vulnerabilities and resilience to challenges.
Preparing the governance statement
A3.1.4 The governance statement is published in each organisation's annual report
and accounts. It should be assembled from work through the year to gain assurance
about performance and insight into the organisation’s risk profile, its responses to
the identified and emerging risks and its success in tackling them.
A3.1.5 There is no set template for the governance statement.
A3.1.6 The AO and the board have a number of inputs into this process:
* the board’s annual review of its own processes and practices, informed
by the views of its audit committee on the organisation’s assurance
arrangements;
n
POL-BSFF-0233694_0074
insight into the organisation's performance from internal audit,
including an audit opinion on the quality of the systems of governance,
management and risk control;
feedback from the delegation chain(s) within the organisation about its
business, its use of resources, its responses to risks, the extent to which
in year budgets and other targets have been met, and any other
internal accountability mechanisms; including:
= bottom-up information and assessments to generate a full
appreciation of performance and risks as they are perceived from
within the organisation;
— end-to-end assessments of processes, since it is possible to neglect
interdependent and compounded risks if only the components are
considered;
- ahigh level overview of the organisation's business so that
systemic risks can be considered in the round;
= any evidence from internal control failures or poor risk
management;
= potentially, information from whistleblowers;
— material from any arm’s length bodies (ALBs) connected with the
organisation which may shed light on the performance of the
organisation or its board.
A3.1.7 It is important that the governance statement covers the material factors
affecting the organisation in the round, not neglecting the more serious (if remote)
risks!, emerging technology and other cutting edge developments. It should also
mention any protective security concerns in suitably careful terms2, with details
reported to the external auditor.
Content of governance statement
A3.1.8 With the board's support, it is for the AO to decide how to:
organise the governance statement;
take account of input from within the organisation and from the board
and its committees;
where relevant, integrate information about the organisation’s ALBs,
some of which may be material to the consolidated organisation;
provide an explanation of how the department ensures that use of any
resources granted to certain locally governed organisations (including
the NHS) is satisfactory. See A3.1.12.
3.1.9 Box A3.1A summarises subjects that should always be covered
1 Including the external risks identified in the National Risk Assessment
2 As set out in the Security Policy Framework
72
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0075
POL00413475
POL00413475
A3.1.10 All the items in this box are important. The risk assessment is critical. This is
where the AO, supported by the board, should discuss how the organisation’s risk
management and internal control mechanism work, and why they were chosen to
deliver reasonable assurance about prevention, deterrent or other appropriate action
to manage the actual and potential problems or opportunities facing the
organisation. Avoiding lengthy description of process, it should assess the evidence
about the effectiveness in practice of the risk management processes in place. In
doing so it should face frankly up to any revealed deficiencies as risks have
materialised.
Box A3.1A: essential features of the governance statement
* the governance framework of the organisation, including information about the board’s
committee structure, its attendance records, and the coverage of its work;
* the board's performance, including its assessment of its own effectiveness;
* highlights of board committee reports, notably by the audit and nomination
committees;
* an account of corporate governance, including the board's assessment of its
compliance with the Corporate Governance Code, with explanations of any departures;
* information about the quality of the data used by the board, and why the board finds it
acceptable;
* — where relevant (for certain central government departments), an account of how
resources made available to certain locally governed organisations are distributed and
how the department gains assurance about their satisfactory use;
* arisk assessment (see annex 4.3), including the organisation's risk profile, and how it is
managed, including, subject to a public interest test:
- any newly identified risk
- arecord of any ministerial directions given
- asummary of any significant lapses of protective security (eg data losses).
A3.1.11 In putting together the governance statement, the AO needs to take a view
‘on the extent to which items are significant enough to the welfare of the
organisation as a whole to be worth recording. There are no hard and fast rules
about this. Some factors to take into account are suggested in box A3.1B.
Box A3.1B: deciding what to include in the governance statement
* might the issue prejudice achievement of the business plan? — or other priorities?
* could the issue undermine the integrity or reputation of the organisation?
* what view does the board’s audit committee take on the point?
* what advice or opinions have internal audit and/or external audit given?
* could delivery of the standards expected of the AO (box3.1) be at risk?
* might the issue increase the risk of fraud or other misuse of resources?
* does the issue put a significant programme or project at risk?
* could the issue divert resources from another significant aspect of the business?
73
POL-BSFF-0233694_0076
POL00413475
POL00413475
* could the issue have a material impact on the accounts?
* — might national security or data integrity be put at risk?
Accounting Officer System Statements
A3.1.12 Government departments should include in their governance statements a
summary account of how they achieve accountability for the grants they distribute
to local government, schools, similar local government organisations and/or the
NHS. It should cover:
* an account of how resources are distributed, eg in response to needs or
desired change;
* how the AO gains assurance about probity in the use of public funds;
* how the AO achieves or encourages value for money in the local use of
grants, eg through local arrangements which provide incentives to
achieve good value;
* the use the AO makes of disaggregated information about
performance, including investigating apparent outliers and/or requiring
those responsible locally to explain their results
A3.1.13 This part of the governance statement should usually be backed by an
accounting officer systems statement, which are published on gov.uk.3 Guidance on
accounting officer system statements can be found online. The system statement
must be clear on the core data and information flows that the system will rely on.
An understanding of these core data requirements should be developed
collaboratively with the entities to be included within the system statement and with
users to meet the need for effective accountability locally and nationally.
A3.1.14 Accounting officer system statements should evolve to reflect improving
practice. Where a Department proposes making major changes, it should contact
Treasury and also consider consulting the relevant Parliamentary committees by
providing them with a draft and the opportunity to comment.
External audit
A3.1.15 The organisation’s external auditor will review the governance statement
for its consistency with the audited financial statement. The external auditor may
report on:
* any inconsistency between evidence collected in the course of the audit
and the discussion of the governance statement; and/or;
* any failure to meet the requirement to comply with or explain
departures from the Corporate Governance Code or any other
authoritative guidance.
3 See, httosi/Awww.gov.uk/governmenycollections/accounting-officer-system-statements
74
POL-BSFF-0233694_0077
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 4.1
Finance Directors
It is government policy that all departments should have professional finance directors reporting to
the permanent secretary with a seat on the departmental board, at a level equivalent to other board
members. It is good practice for all other public sector organisations to do the same, and to operate
to the same standards. This annex sets out the main duties and responsibilities of finance directors.
The finance function
A4.1.1 The finance director of a public sector organisation should:
* be professionally qualified’;
. have board status equivalent to other board members;
* report directly to the permanent head of the organisation;
* be a member of the senior leadership team, the management board
and the executive committee (and/or equivalent bodies), and of the
cross-government Finance Function.
A4.1.2 This demanding leadership role requires a persuasive and confident
communicator with the stature and credibility to command respect and influence at
all levels through the organisation. Its main features are described in box A4.1A.
Many of the day-to-day responsibilities may in practice be delegated, but the
finance director should maintain oversight and control. In large part these duties
consist of ensuring that the financial aspects of the accounting officer's
responsibilities are carried through to the organisation and its arm's length bodies
(ALBs) in depth
Box A4.1A: the role of the finance director
governance
* financial leadership, both within the organisation and to its ALBs, at both a strategic
and operational level
* ensuring sound and appropriate financial governance and risk management
1 The term professional finance director in this context means both being @ qualified member of one of the five bodies comprising
the Consultative Committee of Accounting Bodies (CCAB) in the UK and Ireland, ie the Chartered Institute of Public Finance and
‘Accountancy, the Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales, the Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland,
the Institute of Chartered Accountants in Ireland, the Association of Chartered Certified Accountants, or having equivalent
professional skills and/or qualifications; and having relevant prior exoerience of financial management in either the private or the
public sector.
75
POL-BSFF-0233694_0078
POL00413475
POL00413475
¢ leading, motivating and developing the finance function, establishing its full commercial
contribution to the business
* planning and delivering the financial framework agreed with the Treasury or sponsoring
organisation against the defined strategic and operational criteria
* challenging and supporting decision makers, especially on affordability and value for
money, by ensuring policy and operational proposals with a significant financial
implication are signed-off by the finance function
internal controls
* co-ordinating the planning and budgeting processes
* applying discipline in financial management, including managing banking, debt and
cash flow, with appropriate segregation of duties
* preparation of timely and meaningful management information
* — ensuring that delegated financial authorities are respected
* selection, planning and oversight of any capital projects
* — ensuring efficiency and value for money in the organisation’s activities
* provision of information and advice to the Audit Committee
* leading or promoting change programmes both within the organisation and its ALBs
external links
* preparing Estimates, annual accounts and consolidation data for whole of government
accounts
* liaison with the external auditor
* — liaison with PAC and the relevant Select Committee(s)
¢ — liaison with cross-government Finance Function
* embedding of functional standards
A4.1.3 finance function should maintain a firm grasp of the organisation's financial
position and performance. Supporting the accounting officer, the finance director
should ensure that there is sufficient expertise in depth, supported by effective
systems, to discharge this responsibility and challenge those responsible for the
organisation's activities to account for their financial performance. It is important
that financial management is taken seriously throughout each public sector
organisation.
Financial leadership
44.1.4 The finance director is responsible for leadership of financial responsibilities
within the organisation and its ALBs. He or she should ensure that the information
on which decisions about the use of resources are based is reliable. Box A4.2B
explains some specific responsibilities of the role.
Box A4.1B: financial management leadership
* providing professional advice and meaningful financial analysis enabling decision
makers to take timely and informed business decisions
76
POL-BSFF-0233694_0079
POL00413475
POL00413475
* maintaining a long term financial strategy to underpin the organisation's financial
viability within the agreed framework
* developing and maintaining an effective resource allocation model to optimise outputs
* — ensuring financial probity, regularity and value for money
* — developing and maintaining appropriate asset management and procurement strategies
* reporting accurate and meaningful financial information about the organisation's
performance to ONS, parliament, the Treasury and the general public
* — setting the strategic direction for any commercial activities
* acting as head of profession in the organisation
Internal financial discipline
A4.1.5 The finance director should maintain strong and effective policies to control
and manage use of resources in the organisation's activities. This includes improving
the financial literacy of budget holders in the organisation. Similarly, he or she
should ensure that there are similar disciplines in the organisation’s ALBs. These
should all draw on best practice in accounting and respect the Treasury's
requirements, including, where relevant, accounts directions. These responsibilities
are described in box A4.1C.
Box A4.1C: Financial control
* — enforcing financial compliance across the organisation while guarding against fraud
and delivering continuous improvement in financial control
* applying strong internal controls in all areas of financial management, risk management
and asset control
* — establishing budgets, financial targets and performance indicators to help assess
delivery
* reporting performance of both the organisation and its ALBs to the board, the Treasury
and other parties as required
* value management of long term commercial contracts
* — ensuring that the organisation's capital projects are chosen after appropriate value for
money analysis and evaluation using the Green Book
44.1.6 Individual finance director posts will of course have duties specific to their
organisations and contexts in addition to those set out in this annex. But all finance
director posts should seek to operate to these standards as an essential minimum.
7
POL-BSFF-0233694_0080
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 4.2
Use of models
In modern government modelling is important. It can guide policy development; help determine
implementation plans; and suggest how policies may evolve. Models should be controlled and
understood in their proper context, with effective quality assurance, so that they can be used to good
effect.
Control and governance
A4.2.1 Supported by the board, the accounting officer of a central government
organisation should oversee the use and quality assurance (QA) of models within the
organisation. There should be sufficient feedback for the accounting officer to be
able to track progress and adjust the process.
A4.2.2 Each business critical model should be managed by a senior responsible
officer (SRO) of sufficient seniority and experience, supported by experts and
specialists, to understand the use of the model in context. Project and programme
management techniques can be useful. It is good practice to avoid changing the
SRO frequently.
A4.2.3 Each model is limited by the quality of its input data and founding
assumptions. So the results of any model need to be treated with a degree of
scepticism. It is vital to build sufficient governance into each model to help its users
understand the value and weaknesses of its results. The apparent precision of
mathematical models should not mislead uses into putting more weight on them
than can be justified. Transparency should be the norm in the development and use
of all models
Quality assurance
44.2.4 Whatever the complexity of the model, its governance should include an
element of structured critical challenge to provide a sense check. It can take a
number of forms: for example a steering group, a project board or outside
assessment. New or untried models tend to require more QA than those using
recognised techniques.
A4.2.5 In an organisation using a great deal of modelling, it is good practice for the
accounting officer to appoint a QA champion. Effective QA demands dispassionate
scrutiny by people disengaged with the project but with sufficient knowledge and
experience to help steer the model into a successful approach. There may be a case
for ensuring that different models in different parts of the organisation use
consistent approaches.
78
POL-BSFF-0233694_0081
AA.2.6 It is always good practice to evaluate the risks associated with any model so
that the ultimate users of the model can appreciate what it can and cannot deliver.
Sophisticated models may demand specialist expertise and leadership but the vital
element of constructive lay oversight should never be skimped. Otherwise there can
be a danger that flaws are overlooked because the experts concentrate on the
technical complexities.
A4.2.7 In managing a model, the SRO should consciously decide how it can provide
good value for money. There is no point, for instance, in data collection to a high
degree of accuracy if the assumptions used in the model cannot be exact. Similarly,
there is a stronger case for investing in a model if it forms a central part of a
decision making process.
A4.2.8 References:
QA of government models: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/review-of-
quality-assurance-of-government-models
Guidance on long term financial modelling:
https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/gad-services/government-actuarys-
department-services#actuarial-modelling
Following the report by Sir Nicholas Macpherson into the quality assurance of
analytical models that inform government policy, a cross-departmental working
group on analytical quality assurance was established. The Aqua Book (at the
following link) is one of their key products, and provides a good practice guide for
those working with analysis and analytical models. The landing webpage also links
to a number of other associated resources on quality assurance and modelling
https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/the-aqua-book-quidance-on-
producing-quality-analysis-for-government:
79
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0082
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 4.3
Risk
Each public sector organisation should have systems for identifying and managing risk — both
opportunities and threats — suited to its business, circumstances and risk appetite. The board should
lead the assessment and management of risk, and support the accounting officer in drawing up the
governance statements (see annex 3.1).
The case for managing risk
A4.3.1 Every public sector organisations faces a variety of uncertainties, both positive and
negative, which can affect its success in delivering its objectives, budget and value
for money. So the board of each public sector organisation should actively seek to
recognise both threats and opportunities, and to decide how to respond to them,
including how to set internal controls.
A4.3.2 Managing risk should be integrated into the normal management systems of
each public sector organisation so that it can achieve its goals and maintain a
reputation of credibility and reliability. It is for each accounting officer (AO),
supported by the board, to decide how.
A4.3.3 The board should make a strategic choice about the style, shape and quality
of risk management within each organisation. This is risk tolerance, ie the extent to
which the organisation is willing to accept loss or detriment either in the
performance of its regular services or in order to secure better outcomes. Different
risk tolerances will apply to different circumstances, eg mission critical programmes
or policies might find service failure scarcely tolerable, whereas investment bodies
may care more about achieving financial success even at the price of some failures.
Boards should be willing to take a proportionate approach so that less important
risks do not crowd out the vital ones.
Risk management in practice
A4.3.4 The board's strategic guidance on risk appetite should permeate each
organisation’s programmes, policies, processes and projects. It should determine
how delegations and reporting arrangements work so that departures from plan can
be picked up and dealt with promptly.
44.3.5 Feedback from working level should also inform each board reassessment of
risk. Thus risk management should be a continuous cycle of assessment and
feedback, responding to new information and developments. The essentials of the
process are summarised in box A4.3A.
4.3.6 Each organisation should decide how this cycle should work, in line with its
circumstances, priorities and working practices. The final word must always be for
80
POL-BSFF-0233694_0083
POL00413475
POL00413475
the AO supported by the board, taking a broad and connected view across the
whole organisation.
Box A4.3A: Outline of the risk management cycle
1 The board defines the organisation’s risk tolerance.
2 The organisation identifies and categorises its risks.
3. The organisation assesses the risks identified: how likely their possible impact,
identifying which are beyond tolerance and when.
The board scans the horizon for any remote overlooked risks.
5 The board decides which risks matter and what action should be taken, if any.
Downward delegation of management, coupled with upward reporting of risks through
the organisation enables the board to track performance
7 Using this feedback, the board takes a rounded overview, and may adjust decisions eg
on tolerance or on response.
8 Back to step 1 and iterate as the board chooses.
Identifying risks
A4.3.7 It is important to capture all the organisation's risks so that they can be
evaluated properly in context.
A4.3.8 There is value in getting each part of the organisation to think through its
own risks. At working level operational risks may loom large. It may only be at board
level that it is really possible to scan the horizon for emerging trends, problems or
opportunities that might change the organisation’s working environment. Some of
the critical risks that are easily overlooked are shown in box 4.3B.
Box A4.3B: Examples of risk which are easily missed
* — Information security risks: unsecured digital information can be misplaced or copied.
* — High impact low probability risks: remote risks with serious effect if they happen.
* Opportunity risks: where some choices may close off other alternatives;.
* End to end risks: which emerge when an operational chain fails simultaneously in
several places in a linked set of processes.
+ Inter-organisational risks; which can cause failure of the organisation's business because
of links to partners, suppliers and other stakeholders.
* — Cumulative risks: which happen if several risks precipitate at once, eg in response to the
same trigger.
44.3.9 As well as drawing on risk assessment from within the organisation, it may
be valuable to use an external source to make sure that nothing important has been
overlooked. Sometimes different public sector organisations can help each other out
in this way, to their mutual advantage. And it can be useful to get staff to work
together to consider the subject, eg in facilitated groups.
A4.3.10 Once the organisation’s risks have been identified, it is possible to draw up
a risk register. This is a list of recognised risks which can be kept up to date and
which the board can review regularly. Each organisation needs to decide how to
81
POL-BSFF-0233694_0084
POL00413475
POL00413475
prioritise its total risk exposure so that the board can take an informed strategic
approach to risk for the organisation as whole.
Responding to risk
A4.3.11 Each organisation needs to decide whether, and if so how, to respond to
its identified risks. Some standard responses are listed in box A4.3C.
Box A4.3C: Some standard responses to risk
Treat: a common response. Treatment can mean imposing controls so that the organisation can
continue to operate; or setting up prevention techniques. See box 4.3D for possible treatments.
Transfer: another organisation might carry out an activity in which it is more expert. Insurance is not
usually open to public sector organisations (see annex 4.4) but other forms of transfer are, eg using a
payroll bureau. Some risks cannot be transferred, especially reputational risk. So delegating
organisations should retain oversight of their agents, with scope for remedial action when necessary.
Terminate: it may be best to stop (or not to start) activities which involve intolerable risks or those
where no response can bring the residual risk to a tolerable level, eg failing projects where it is
cheaper to start again. This option is not always available in the public sector, which sometimes has to
shoulder difficult risks — typically remote but potentially serious ones — which the private sector can
choose to avoid.
Tolerate: for risks where the downside is containable with appropriate contingency plans; for some
where the possible controls cannot be justified (eg because they would be disproportionate); and for
unavoidable risks, eg terrorism.
Take the opportunity: boards may embrace some risks, accepting their downside perhaps with
controls or preventative action, in the expectation of beneficial outcomes. Avoiding all risk can be as
irresponsible as disregarding risk.
A4.3.12 In choosing responses, the acid test is whether the residual risk can be
made acceptable after action. All controls should be realistic, proportionate to the
ntended reduction of risk, and offer good value for money. The more common
ypes are listed in box A4.3D.
Box A4.3D: Common controls
Preventive action: measures to eliminate or limit undesirable outcomes, eg improving training or risk
awareness; or stopping transfer of digital information using datasticks. Beware of imposing
unnecessary costs or damaging innovation.
Corrective controls: measures to deal with damaging aspects of realised risks, eg clauses to recover the
cost of failure of a contract. Includes contingency planning.
Directive controls: measures designed to specify the way in which a process is carried out to rule out
some obvious potential damage, eg hygiene requirements.
Detective controls: measures to identify damage so that it can be remedied quickly. Especially useful
where prevention is not appropriate, but can be a useful cross check elsewhere, eg stock controls.
A4.3.13 However it is treated, it is usually impossible to eliminate all risk. It would
often be poor value for money to do so were it possible. So it is good practice to
associate application of controls with contingency planning to cope with resolution
of damage when risks precipitate. Many organisations find it useful to dry run these
plans: first to check that they work, second to make sure they are proportionate and
third to boil out any unnecessary features they may have.
82
POL-BSFF-0233694_0085
The Board
A4.3.14 Risk management is a key governance task for the board. It should take a
strategic view of risk in the organisation in the round, factoring together all the
relevant input it can reasonably use. For example, it may consider to what extent
risks interact, cumulate or cancel each other out. And consideration of risk should
feature in all the board's significant decisions.
A4.3.15 It is good practice for the board to consider risk regularly as part of its
normal flow of management information about the organisation’s activities. It is
good practice for each layer of management to give upward assurance about its
performance, so reinforcing responsibility through the structure.
A4.3.16 It is up to each board to decide how frequently it wants to consider risk.
Some set regular timetables to consider the whole risk register, while some choose
to look at parts of the risk register in a regular sequence. Scrutiny of this kind
enables the board to assess developments in context and make confident decisions
about their relevance and significance.
4.3.17 It is good practice for the board to make these assessments on the advice
of its Audit Committee, though it should form its own view. Audit committees can
also add value by chasing up implementation of the organisation's responses to PAC
reports. Each Audit Committee should be chaired by a non- executive board
member, drawing on input from the organisation's internal reporting and internal
audit functions.
A4.3.18 Having weighed the identified risks, the board should also seek to
distinguish unidentified risks, some of which may be remote. Box 4.3B offers some
possibilities though it is not exhaustive. This process may lead the board to
reconsider its strategy on risk tolerance.
4.3.19 A useful focus of board risk work is supporting the AO in preparation of the
governance statement for publication in its annual report (se annex 3.1). It should
include an account of how the organisation has responded to risk and what it is
doing both to contain and manage risk; and also to rise to opportunities.
4.3.20 More generally, the board should make sure that lessons are learned from
the organisation's experience. This applies particularly to perceived failures, eg an
unforeseen risk or a crystallised risk which turned out more damaging than
expected. But it is equally true of successes, especially those where risk was
managed well, to see whether there is anything to be gained by repeating effective
techniques elsewhere.
A4.3.21 Finally, the board should consider whether the organisation’s risks are
being treated appropriately. If damage has been prevented, it may be possible to
adjust the existing response to risk to achieve equally successful results by less
expensive or less invasive techniques, eg replacing physical controls with security
cameras.
Departmental Groups
A4.3.22 Nearly all government departments sponsor one or more arm’s length
bodies (ALBs) for which they take ultimate responsibility while allowing them a
degree of (or sometimes considerable) independence (see chapter 7). The accounts
83
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0086
POL00413475
POL00413475
of these ALBs are consolidated with their sponsor department's accounts,
emphasising that the sponsor stands behind them.
A4.3.23 It follows that each department board should consider the group’s risk
profile including the businesses of its ALBs. The potential liabilities of some ALBs (eg
in the nuclear field) can be so great that they may overshadow the department's
own, so this is essential hygiene.
A4.3.24 References:
The Orange Book: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/orange-book
Other Treasury risk guidance
http://webarchive.nationalarchives.gov.uk/20130129110402/http://www.hm-
treasury.gov.uk/psr_governance_risk_riskguidance.htm
NAO report on Managing risks in government:
http://www.nao.org.uk/report/managing-risks-in-government/
GAD’s practical guide to strategic risk management:
https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/strategic-risk-management
84
POL-BSFF-0233694_0087
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 4.4
Insurance
Central government organisations should not generally take out commercial insurance because it is
better value for money for the taxpayer to cover its own risks. However, there are some circumstances
where commercial insurance is appropriate. This annex sets out the issues to be considered. This
guidance applies to departments and their arms-length bodies.
A4.4.1 Central government organisations should not normally buy commercial insurance to
protect against risk. Since the government can pool and spread its own risks, there is
little need to pay the private sector to provide this service. In general it is cheaper for
the government to cover its own risks.
A4.4.2 However, in certain circumstances, as part of forming a risk management
strategy, the accounting officer in a public sector organisation may choose to
purchase commercial insurance to protect certain parts of the organisation's
portfolio. Such decisions should always be made after a cost benefit analysis in order
to secure value for money for the Exchequer as a whole. Some acceptable reasons
for using insurance are set out in box A4.4A.
Box A4.4A: Where commercial insurance may provide value for money
+ Building insurance as a condition of the lease and where the lessor will not accept an
indemnity: commercial insurance may be taken out where the cost of accommodation,
together with the cost of insurance, is more cost effective than other accommodation
options.
* Overall site insurance: private sector contractors and developers usually take out a
single-site insurance policy because it is cheaper than each individual party insuring
themselves separately. So a client organisation may be able to cover its risks at little or
no extra cost.
* Insurance of boilers and lifts: which may be a condition of taking out a lease, and
typically involves periodic expert inspection designed to reduce the risk of loss or
damage.
* Commercial initiatives: because these activities are outside the government's core
responsibilities, losses on a department's discretionary commercial activities could
reduce resources available for its core activities (see chapter 7). It will usually therefore
make sense to insure them. Any goods used for services sold to other parts of central
government should not, however, be insured
* Where commercial insurance is integral to a project: eg, where private contractors insist,
it may be appropriate to purchase insurance even if the net benefit is negative. But this
may be a sign that the project needs restructuring to avoid any requirement to buy
85
POL-BSFF-0233694_0088
POL00413475
POL00413475
commercial insurance, perhaps through letters of comfort or statements of support. The
costs and benefits of taking out insurance should be included in the appraisal of the
project as a whole.
A4.4.3 Some ALBs may be in a slightly different position to central government
departments. Box A4.4B gives examples of some items they may choose to insure
commercially.
Box A4.4B: Items ALBs may insure
* items the ALB is required to insure, eg vehicles where the Road Traffic Acts require it.
* physical assets where a cost benefit analysis supports the case for insurance and the
sponsor department agrees.
* goods owned by ALBs receiving less than 50% of their income from the Exchequer
(through grant-in-aid or fees and charges). Commercial insurance protects the risk to
the Exchequer from claims from third parties.
* items used by an ALB for income generation schemes to supplement the approved level
of public spending. Commercial insurance is appropriate to cover the risks lest costs or
losses could not be met out of receipts.
Appraising the options
A4.4.4 Decisions on whether to buy insurance should be based on objective cost-
benefit analysis, using guidance in the Green Book’. Box A4.4C outlines some
factors which are often worth considering in such assessments.
Box A4.4C: Costs and benefits which could be included in assessments
Costs:
* the insurance premium which may be paid
* the administrative cost of managing claims with the insurance company
Benefits:
* transfer of risk, valued at the expected compensation for the insured losses
* — claims handling, where the insurance company will manage claims against third parties
* the value of guaranteed business recovery: the potential reduction in the time taken to
reinstate losses, reducing business interruption
Setting fees and charges
A4.4.5 If a central government organisation insures risks arising in supplying a
service for which a fee or charge is levied, the actual premium payments should be
included in the calculation of costs when deciding the fee or charge. Similarly,
where a central government organisation self-insures, the notional cost of premium
payments should be taken into account. See Chapter 6 for further details.
1 hetps:/Awww.gov.ul/government/publications/the-green-book-appraisal-and-evaluation-in-central-governent
86
POL-BSFF-0233694_0089
Claims administration
A4.4.6 Managing claims against third parties can be time-consuming and require
expert attention. Insurance companies may be better placed than public sector
organisations to deal with claims economically and efficiently. So contracting-out
claims administration to an insurance company might be more cost-effective than
retaining the work in-house
Reporting
44.4.7 Departments should inform their Treasury spending team of:
* any decision to use the services of commercial insurance companies
* any reviews of insurance, or alternatives to insurance, that might
contain lessons of wider application
A4.4.8 In turn ALBs should consult their sponsor departments in similar
circumstances.
Dealing with losses
Uninsured losses (except traffic accidents)
A4.4.9 Where a loss occurs or a third-party claim is received, public sector
organisations should initially consider whether the loss should be made good or the
claim accepted. Thus:
+ loss of or damage to assets: the question of repair or replacement
should always be carefully considered, taking account of the need for
the asset and current policies. This decision is, in effect, a new
investment decision and should be appraised accordingly;
+ third-party claims: the justification for the claim should be carefully
considered with appropriate legal advice.
A4.4.10 If the organisation decides to repair or replace an asset, or meet a third
party claim, it should normally expect to meet the cost from within its existing
allocations. The Treasury does not routinely entertain bids for additional resources in
such cases. If a bid did arise the Treasury would consider it on its merits and in the
light of the resources available, in the same way as other bids for increases in
provision. Similarly, ALBs should not normally expect their sponsor departments to
meet claims for reimbursement of loss.
Insured losses
A4.4.11 Public sector organisations should make insurance claims in accordance
with the terms of the policy.
A4.4.12 ALBs may retain amounts paid under commercial insurance policies to meet
expenditure resulting from losses or third-party claims. If it is decided not to replace
or to repair an insured asset, the sponsor department may reduce any grant in aid
payable to the ALB.
87
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0090
POL00413475
POL00413475
Claims between public sector organisations
A4.4.13 If two uninsured departments are involved in an incident causing loss to
‘one or other, it is immaterial to the Exchequer whether one claims on the other for
the damage. For small claims it would not be value for money for the Exchequer to
make interdepartmental adjustments in the case of minor damage. Similar waiver
arrangements should apply up to mutually agreed limits between other public sector
organisations. But waiver arrangements of this kind are not appropriate where there
are rights of claim against third parties. It will always be regarded as novel,
contentious, or repercussive for one central government organisation to seek legal
redress from another central government organisation through the courts, meaning
that Treasury consent is always required.
A4.4.14 Box A4.4D shows how to proceed when one central government
organisation makes a larger claim against one or more others.
Box A4.4D: Handling claims between public sector organisations
Insurance status Settlement of claims
All insured Insurers settle claims
All uninsured Organisation(s) at fault negotiate about whether to
reimburse the other(s)
Organisation at fault uninsured, other Insured organisation claims on its insurance policy.
organisation(s) insured Uninsured organisation(s) deal with claims from the
insurers on the basis of strict legal liability
Organisation at fault insured, other organisation(s) Uninsured organisation(s) seek financial satisfaction
uninsured through the insurers of the organisation(s) at fault
Vehicles
A4.4.15 Most ALBs insure third-party vehicle claims to comply with the Road Traffic
Acts. Public sector organisations that are not insured for traffic accidents should
refer any third-party claims, either for or against, to the Treasury Solicitor who acts
on behalf of the government.
A4.4.16 Many claims between public sector organisations involving damage to, or
loss caused by, vehicles, can be handled using the arrangements in paragraph
A4.4.13.
A4.4.17 Vehicles travelling in EU countries must comply with Directives. These
require vehicles operating in another's territory to be covered by insurance to the
extent required by the legislation in territory of the journey, unless there are
acceptable alternative arrangements, eg indemnities.
Loans
A4.4.18 When government assets are loaned to a body other than a public sector
organisation which does not insure, it is important to protect the interests of the
lending organisation. So the borrower should insure against damage or loss of the
88
POL-BSFF-0233694_0091
POL00413475
POL00413475
assets from the time of receipt and against claims by third parties including its own
employees. An indemnity by the borrower is an acceptable substitute if the lender is
satisfied that the borrower could and would meet any damage or other loss
A4.4.19 Public sector organisations are usually expected to meet the cost of insuring
any government assets (eg. equipment or stores) held by a contractor in the normal
course of business. The cost of any insurance against risks arising from negligence or
wilful misconduct by the contractor's employees should be borne by the contractor.
These arrangements should be explicitly set out in the relevant contract.
A4.4.20 Public sector organisations which borrow objects of value from a non-
government body should normally offer the owner an indemnity against damage or
loss. Such indemnities should leave no doubt as to the extent and duration of the
borrowing organisation's liability. And they may need to be reported if they fall
within the parliamentary reporting requirements (see annex 5.4)
A4.4.21 Borrowers should only take out commercial insurance for loaned items of
value if the owner insists upon it, or if the borrower has reason to believe that
commercial insurance would be more cost effective than giving an indemnity.
Employers’ liability
A4.4.22 The Crown is not bound by the Employers’ Liability (Compulsory Insurance)
Act 1969. So departments need not insure the risks outlined in the Act. Decisions on
whether to insure should be taken on value for money grounds after an appraisal
Similarly, parliamentary bodies such as the National Audit Office, the Parliamentary
Commissioner (Ombudsman) and the Independent Parliamentary Standards
Authority need not insure against employers’ liability risks as they are exempted
under the Employers’ Liability (Compulsory Insurance) (Amendment) Regulations
2011 (SI 201 1/686).
A4.4.23 A body funded by grant in aid need not insure against employers’ liability
risks. This is because the Employers’ Liability (Compulsory Insurance) Regulations
1998 (SI 1998/2573) provide exemption for any body (or person who may be an
employer) holding a certificate issued by a government department. Again, the
decision on whether to insure will depend on a value for money assessment. If the
organisation chooses not to insure, responsibility for the issue of certificates in
accordance with the Act rests with the department responsible for paying grant in
aid, provided that it is satisfied that this is the appropriate course.
A4.4.24 The scope of the certificate should be strictly confined to the risks with
which the Employers’ Liability (Compulsory Insurance) Act 1969 is concerned, and
may not be extended to any other risks. It should be in the form set out in Box
A4.4E. Departments should ensure that the circumstances in which certificates have
been issued are reviewed from time to time, so that certificates may be revoked if
circumstances change.
Box: 4.4.E: form of exemption certificate
In accordance with the provisions of paragraph 1 of Schedule 2 of the Employers' Liability
(Compulsory Insurance) Regulations 1998 (SI 1998/2573), the Minister of ....../Secretary of State
for...... hereby certifies that any claim established against [here specify the body or person] in
respect of any liability to [here specify the employees involved] of the kind mentioned in section
89
POL-BSFF-0233694_0092
POL00413475
POL00413475
1(1) of the Employers’ Liability (Compulsory Insurance) Act 1969 will, to any extent to which it is
otherwise incapable of being satisfied by the aforementioned employer, be satisfied out of
moneys provided by parliament.
90
POL-BSFF-0233694_0093
Annex 4.5
Senior Responsible Owner
Accountability
A4.5.1 Senior Responsible Owners (SRO) for Major Projects (as defined in the Government's
Major Project Portfolio) are in a special position in that they are expected to account
for and explain the decisions and actions they have taken to deliver the projects for
which they have personal responsibility. This line of accountability should be made
clear to SROs in their appointment letter which is published on GOV.UK.
A4.5.2 The Government publishes on an annual basis a list of the SROs for the
Government's Major Project Portfolio (as defined by the Infrastructure and Projects
Authority).
44.5.3 Where a Committee wishes to take evidence from an SRO of one of these
major projects it will be on the understanding that the SRO will be expected to
account for the implementation and delivery of the project and for their own
actions. Appointment letters will make clear the point at which an SRO becomes
directly accountable for the implementation of the project in question. The SRO will
also be able to disclose to the Committee where a Minister or official has intervened
to change the project during the implementation phase in a way which has
implications for cost and/or timeline of implementation. In this respect the SRO
should also be able to disclose their advice about any such changes.
A4.5.4 Accounting Officers are ultimately accountable for the performance of all the
business under their control, including major projects for which an individual SRO
has direct accountability and responsibility. And in this respect, if a Select
Committee calls for evidence from an SRO, the Accounting Officer of the
department may also be called to support the SRO at a hearing.
A4.5.5 This line of direct accountability for SROs does not alter the special position
and relationship of Accounting Officers with the PAC.
A4.5.6 The Government Functional Standard GovS 002: Project Delivery sets the
expectations for the direction and management of portfolios, programmes and
projects for all government departments and arm’s length bodies. An SRO should
refer to this standard to ensure the breadth of practices required for successful
delivery are used. https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/project-delivery-
functional-standard
A4.5.7 Further information on the accountability, relationship to other key
leadership roles in project delivery and the selection and appointment of an SRO is
available in Infrastructure and Project Authority guidance on the role of the senior
responsible owner. https:/Awww.gov.uk/government/publications/the-role-of-the-
senior-responsible-owner
91
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0094
POL00413475
POL00413475
A4.5.8 Further information is available in Cabinet Office guidance for officials from
departments and agencies on giving evidence to Parliamentary Select Committees
(the Osmotherly Rules).
92
POL-BSFF-0233694_0095
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 4.6
Procurement
It is important to secure value for money in asset management through sound procurement. Public
sector organisations should normally acquire goods and services through fair and open competition,
acting on Cabinet Office advice. This annex provides an overview of the policy framework for public
procurement.
A4.6.1 Good procurement practice demands that public sector organisations buy the goods, works and
services they need using fair and open procurement processes, guarding against corruption and
meeting the standards in MPM. World Trade Organisation (WTO) agreements and many of the
UK’s trade deals underpin these principles. The specific responsibilities are set out in box A4.6A.
Box A4.6A: checklist of key purchasing responsibilities
General
* value for money, normally through competition;
* compliance with legal obligations including those imposed by international agreements;
* follow Government Procurement Service! policies and standards on public procurement.
Management approach
* leadership on the importance of procurement in delivering objectives;
* define roles and responsibilities of key staff, with adequate separation of duties;
* promote awareness (including in ALBs) of the importance of procurement policy and
the GPS guidance.
Planning and engagement
* — clarify objectives of procurement from the start
* consider how the procurement strategy could attract a diverse range of suppliers
including SMEs and civil society organisations;
* consider collaborative or shared procurement with other organisations to maximise
purchasing power;
* design procurement strategy and engage with the market early and well before
competition starts;
* consult GPS on any difficult legal issues.
Skills
* use procurement professionals throughout;
1 httos /www.dov.uk/governmenVorganisations/crown-commercial-service
93
POL-BSFF-0233694_0096
POL00413475
POL00413475
* ensure that there is sufficient skills capacity in undertaking and managing procurements
and projects.
Review
* apply the Gateway™ review process;
* draw issues which may have wider implications to the Cabinet Office's attention.
A4.6.2 This guidance is intended to be fully consistent with the UK's international obligations. It
does not create any rights or legal obligations.
Value for money
A4.6.3 Value for money is a key concept (see paragraph 3.3.3 and box A4.6B). It means
securing the best mix of quality and effectiveness for the least outlay over the period of use of
the goods or services bought. It is not about minimising up front prices. Whether in
conventional procurement, market testing, private finance or some other form of public private
partnership, finding value for money involves an appropriate allocation of risk.
Box A4.6B: securing value for money
Cost: the key factor is whole life cost, not lowest purchase price. Whole life cost takes into account
the cost over time, including capital, maintenance, management, operating and disposal costs. For
complex procurements, whole-life cost can be very different from initial price.
Quality: paying more for higher quality may be justified if the whole life cost is better, for example,
taking into account maintenance costs, useful life and residual value. The purchaser should determine
whether increased benefits justify higher costs.
Perspective: each public sector organisation’s procurement strategy should seek to achieve the best
value outcome for the Exchequer as a whole, not just for the organisation itself. This should be
designed in before the invitation to tender is published.
Collaborative procurement: in the vast majority of cases, standardising and aggregating procurement
requirements will deliver better value for money. Public sector organisations, including smaller ones,
should therefore collaborate as far as possible on procurement in line with GPS practice.
A4.6.4 Purchasers need to develop clear strategies for continuing improvement in the
procedures for acquisition of goods, works and services. Public sector organisations should
collaborate with each other, following guidance, in order to secure economies of scale, unless
they can achieve better value for the Exchequer as a whole some other way. Smaller suppliers
should have fair access to see if they able to deliver better value for money.
Legal framework
A4.6.5 Public sector organisations are responsible for ensuring that they comply with the law on
procurement (see box A4.6C) taking account of Cabinet Office guidance?
The user's requirement
A4.6.6 Procurement should help deliver relevant departmental and government-wide strategies
and policies. The procuring organisation should establish that the supply sought is really needed,
is likely to be cost effective and affordable. And the published specification should explain clearly
what outcomes are required, since this is crucial to obtaining the supply required. Once it is
decided that third party procurement appears better value for money than provision in-house, a
2 Cabinet Office guidance: httos://www.gov.uk/governmenVorganisations/crown-commercial-service
94
POL-BSFF-0233694_0097
POL00413475
POL00413475
range of models should be considered, for example employee-led mutuals and joint ventures as
well as more traditional outsourcing.
Box A4.6C: the legal framework for public procurement
* international obligations, notably WTO agreements
* domestic legislation, including subordinate legislation implementing directives;
* contract and commercial law in general
+ domestic case law
The procurement process and suppliers
A4.6.7 Competition promotes economy, efficiency and effectiveness in public expenditure.
Works, goods and services should be acquired through competition unless there are convincing
reasons to the contrary, and where appropriate should comply with domestic advertising rules
and policy as well as relevant obligations imposed on the UK by its international agreements.
The form of competition chosen should be appropriate to the value and complexity of the goods
or services to be acquired.
A4.6.8 Public sector organisations should aim to treat suppliers responsibly to maintain good
reputations as purchasers (see box A4.6D), taking account of the government's Procurement
pledge to help stimulate economic growth?
Box A4.6D: relationships with suppliers
* high professional standards in the award of contracts
* clear procurement contact points
* adequate information for suppliers to respond to the bidding process
* the outcome of bids announced promptly
* feedback to winners and losers on request on the outcome of the bidding process
* high professional standards in the management of contracts
* prompt, courteous and efficient responses to suggestions, enquiries and complaints
A4.6.9 In carrying out efficient sourcing projects, central government should follow best
practice.
4.6.10 One such approach is LEAN approach¢ whose principles are designed to make doing
business with government more efficient and cost-effective (for both buyers and suppliers) to
support economic growth.
A4.6.11 During the evaluation stage of sourcing, it is important to for public sector procuring
organisations to:
* establish the propriety of candidate suppliers — taking account of the requirement
to exclude those convicted of, for example, fraud, theft, fraudulent trading or
cheating HMRC;
3 Procurement Pledge (http://www cabinetoffice. gov.uk/resource-library/our-procurement-pledge)
4 httos/www gov.uk/qovernment/publications/lean-sourcing-quidance-for-public-sector-buyers
95
POL-BSFF-0233694_0098
POL00413475
POL00413475
* assess suppliers’ economic and financial standing to gain confidence of their
capacity to carry out fully what the buyer requires within the pre-determined
timescale and deliver value for money;
* secure value for money (see box A.4.6B), using relevant and consistent criteria for
evaluating the key factors (cost, size, sustainability, design etc).
Contracts
A4.6.12 In drawing up contracts, purchasers should, where possible:
* use model terms and conditions developed in the light of collective experience and
which may help avoid prejudicing the position of others using the same supplier;
* avoid variation of price clauses in contracts of less than two years' duration; and
+ Include prompt payment clauses.
A4.6.13 Purchasers cannot enter into contracts with other parts of the legal entity to which they
belong, so different parts of the Crown cannot contract with each other. Instead internal
agreements which fall short of being contracts are used (typically service level agreements).
These may have all the hallmarks of contracts other than scope for legal enforcement.
Central purchasing bodies and agencies
A4.6.14 Central government organisations are required to use the services and collaborative
procurement deals managed by the Government Procurement Service on behalf of governments.
A4.6.15 If public sector purchasers employ private sector agents to undertake procurement on
their behalf they should:
* require compliance with the law (see box A4.6C);
. ensure clear allocation of responsibilities; and
* where appropriate, obtain the agent's indemnity against any costs incurred as a
result of its failure to comply with the legal framework on its behalf.
Taxation
A4.6.16 Central government bodies should:
* base procurement decisions independent of any tax advantages that may arise from
a particular bid;
* avoid contractors using offshore jurisdictions, consistent with international
obligations and the government's stated objectives on tax transparency and
openness;
* be vigilant in not facilitating tax arrangements with suppliers or their agents that
are detrimental or disadvantageous to the Exchequer. Public sector organisations
need to take special care in relation to the tax arrangements of public appointees
(see Cabinet Office guidances);
5 Cabinet Office guidance: https:/www.gov.uk/governmenVorganisations/crown-commercial-service
6 Cabinet Office guidance: Procurement Policy Note ~ Tax arrangements of Public Appointees
96
POL-BSFF-0233694_0099
POL00413475
POL00413475
* employ internal management processes to ensure that transactions that give rise to
questions of propriety of tax arrangements are brought to the accounting officer's
or, if necessary, ministers’ attention.
A4.6.17 In the case of bids under the Private Finance (PF2), it is particularly important to ensure
that comparisons of competing bids take account of any tax planning by bidders. The Treasury's
Green Book provides for a tax adjusted Public Sector Comparator to allow for the (usually)
material tax difference between a PF2 option and the wholly public sector alternative. It would
be inappropriate to apply this to bids where tax planning has cancelled out this effect.
A4.6.18 Public procurement projects involving the transfer of real estate or assets that are likely
to appreciate in value can often give rise to specific tax issues, in particular liability to capital
gains tax. If public sector organisations are negotiating with bodies that wish to structure
procurement proposals in this way, they should consult the Treasury and HMRC at an early stage
to identify the likely tax implications and assess the proposal for propriety generally.
Further guidance
A4.6.19 Central sources of guidance on procurement and related issues include:
* the Government Commercial Function
(https:/Awww.gov.uk/government/organisations/government-commercial-function)
* the Treasury's Green Book on project appraisal and evaluation in central
government
(https:/Awww.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/179
349/green_book_complete.pdf.pdf);
+ Department for Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy guidance on compliance
with the subsidy obligations arising from the UK’s international agreements
(https:/Awww.gov.uk/government/publications/complying-with-the-uks-
international-obligations-on-subsidy-control-guidance-for-public-authorities)
* Procurement Policy Notes
(https://www.gov.uk/government/collections/procurement-policy-notes);
+ The Crown Commercial Service (https://www.crowncommercial.gov.uk/);
+ Cartels and bid-rigging
(https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/284
413/oft435.pdf ); and
+ HM Revenue and Customs on tax avoidance issues
(http:/www.hmre.gov.uk/avoidance/).
7
POL-BSFF-0233694_0100
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 4.7
Subsidies
44.7.1 The transition period which followed the UK’s departure from the European Union
ended on 31 December 2020, and EU law ceased to have any force in the UK (save
in those areas provided for by the Withdrawal Agreement).! UK public bodies must
continue ensure compliance with all relevant domestic and international subsidies
rules, including World Trade Organisation commitments and commitments the UK
has entered into under bilateral Trade Agreements.
AA.7.2 In certain areas the government has published updated guidance, which can
be found on gov.uk. Accounting Officers should be aware that obligations arising
from domestic and international law are binding for the whole public sector and
assist their partner organisations in complying where new obligations have arisen.
Box A4.7A: further guidance
BEIS guidance on complying with international obligations on subsidy control —
https:/Awww.gov.uk/government/publications/complying-with-the-uks-international-obligations-on-
subsidy-control-quidance-for-public-authorities
1 This annex has been retitled 'Subsidies’ from ‘State aids’ to reflect this.
98
POL-BSFF-0233694_0101
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 4.8
Expenditure and payments
As part of the process of authorising and controlling commitments and expenditure of public funds,
public sector organisations should time their expenditure and payments to provide good value for
public money.
A4.8.1 Public sector organisations should use good commercial practice in managing the
flows of expenditure and commitments they deal with. Box 4.3 has some sound
high level principles. These need to be interpreted in the context of each
organisation's business, in line with current legislation and using modern
commercial practice. The actual techniques used may thus change from time to time
and from place to place.
A4.8.2 In particular, public sector organisations should;
* explain payment procedures to suppliers;
* agree payment terms at the outset and stick to them;
* pay bills in accordance with agreed terms, or as required by law;
* tell suppliers without delay when an invoice is contested; and
* settle quickly when a contested invoice gets a satisfactory response.
A4.8.3 Public sector organisations are also bound by legislation’ aiming to ensure
that in commercial transactions, the payment period does not exceed 30 calendar
days after the debtor receives an invoice. Further advice is available from the Cabinet
Office and BEIS.
A4.8.4 However, the Government recognises that the public sector should set a
strong example by paying promptly. Central government departments should aim to
pay 80% of undisputed invoices within 5 days. They should also include a clause in
their contracts requiring prime contractors to pay their suppliers within 30 days. The
principles in Box 4.4 must still be applied to all payments. Further guidance is
available2 .
I The Late Payment of Commercial Debts (Interest) Act 1998 (as amended by The Late Payment of Commercial Debt Regulations
2002 (SI 1674) and the Late Payment of Commercial Debt Regulations 2013)
2 The Prompt Payment Code httoy/mww. oromptoaymentcode.org.uk/
99
POL-BSFF-0233694_0102
Payments outside the normal pattern
A4.8.5 Payments in advance of need should be exceptional, and should only be
considered if a good value for money case for the Exchequer can be made. Even
then, as advance payments lead to higher Exchequer financing costs, such payments
are novel and contentious and require specific Treasury approval. Advance payment
should never be used to circumvent expenditure controls or budgetary limits.
A4.8.6 In particular, it is not good value for money for public sector organisations to
act as a source of finance to contractors who have access to other forms of loan
finance. So advance payments to contractors (ie payments made before equivalent
value is received in return) should only be considered if, for example, a price
discount commensurate with the time value of the funds in question can provide a
good value for money case. Exceptions to these guidelines, which would not
normally require specific Treasury approval, include
* service and maintenance contracts which require payment when the
contract commences, provided that the service is available and can be
called on from the date of payment;
* grants to small voluntary or community bodies where the recipient
needs working capital to carry out the commitment for which the grant
is paid and private sector finance would reduce value for money;
* minor services such as training courses, conference bookings or
magazine subscriptions, where local discretion is acceptable; and
* prepayments up to a modest limit agreed with the Treasury, where a
value for money assessment demonstrates clear advantage in early
payment.
A4.8.7 Interim payments may have an element of prepayment and so public sector
organisations should consider them carefully before agreeing to them. However, if
they are genuinely linked to work completed or physical progress satisfactorily
achieved, preferably as defined under a contract, they may represent acceptable
value for public funds. Taking legal advice as necessary, organisations should,
however, consider whether:
* the contractor’s reduced need for working capital should be reflected in
reduced prices;
* the contractor should provide a performance bond in the form of a
bank guarantee to deal with possible breach of contract.
A4.8.8 Public sector organisations should not, however, use interim payments to
circumvent public spending controls. For example, it is not acceptable to make
payments where value has not been received, simply to avoid underspending
A4.8.9 Deferred payments are generally not good practice. They normally mean
paying more to compensate the contractor for higher financing costs and are thus
poor value for money (at the margin the Exchequer can always borrow more cheaply
than the private sector). So any proposal for deliberate late payment is potentially
novel and contentious. Any central government organisation considering deferred
payments must thus seek Treasury approval before proceeding.
100
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0103
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 4.9
Fraud
Governance in public sector organisations includes arrangements for preventing, countering and
dealing with fraud. This annex provides further detail.
A4.9.1 Accounting officers are responsible for managing public sector organisations’ risks,
including fraud. Each organisation faces a range of fraud risks specific to its
business, from internal and external sources. The Fraud Act 2006 recognises that a
criminal offence of fraud arises from causing a loss to an individual or legal entity
through the intentional misdeclaration of information; knowingly withholding
information; or through an abuse of position. The risk of a given fraud is usually
measured by the probability of its occurring and its impact in monetary and
reputational terms should it occur. Fraud can also have other impacts including
undermining the delivery of government policy objectives and outcomes and
physical or societal harm.
A4.9.2 In broad terms, managing the risk of fraud involves:
* assessing the organisation's overall vulnerability to fraud;
* identifying the areas most vulnerable to fraud risk;
+ evaluating the scale of fraud risk;
* responding to fraud risk;
* — detecting fraud;
* measuring the effectiveness of the fraud risk strategy; and
* reporting fraud.
44.9.3 The most effective way to manage the risk of fraud is to prevent it from
happening by developing an effective anti-fraud culture.
For guidance on all these areas, see Tackling Internal Fraud’ and Tackling External
Fraud?
1 httoy/webarchive,nationalarchives.gov.uk/20130129110402/htto/Mvww.hm-treasury.gov.ul/osr_managing risk of fraud. htm
2 http://www. na0.org.uk/report/good-practice-in-tackling-external-fraud-2/
101
POL-BSFF-0233694_0104
Assessing vulnerability to fraud
A4.9.4 Each organisation should identify and assess at different levels how it might
be vulnerable to fraud with reference to the HMG standards for Fraud Risk
Assessment. Fraud should be always considered as a risk for the departments’ risk
register.
Evaluating the scale of fraud risk
A4.9.5 Public sector organisations should evaluate the possible impact and
likelihood of the specific fraud risks it has identified. These should be reviewed
regularly. From this, each organisation should deduce a priority order for managing
its fraud risks and target its interventions accordingly. This will inform decisions
about the actions to be taken to manage fraud risk effectively.
Responding to fraud risk
A4.9.6 The organisation's response to fraud risk should be customised to the risks it
faces. Typically it will involve some or all of the following
* Developing a Fraud Policy Statement, a Fraud Risk Strategy and a Fraud
Response Plan (key documents that every organisation should have).
+ Developing and promoting an anti-fraud culture, maybe through a
clear statement of commitment to ethical behaviour to promote
awareness of fraud. Recruitment screening, training and maintaining
good staff morale can also be important.
* — Allocating responsibilities for the overall and specific management of
fraud risk so that these processes are integrated into management.
+ Establishing cost-effective internal systems of control to prevent and
detect fraud.
+ Developing the skills and expertise to manage fraud risk effectively and
to respond to fraud effectively when it arises.
* Establishing well publicised avenues for staff and members of the
public to report suspicions of fraud.
* Responding quickly and effectively to fraud when it arises
* — Establishing systems for investigations into allegations of fraud.
* Using the government's Counter Fraud Function and/or Internal Audit
to advise on fraud risk and drawing on their experience to strengthen
control
* Taking appropriate action (criminal, disciplinary) against fraudsters and
seeking to recover losses.
* Continuously evaluating the effectiveness of anti-fraud measures in
reducing fraud
* — Working with stakeholders to tackle fraud through intelligence sharing,
joint investigations, etc.
102
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0105
* — Having a programme of fraud risk assessment, and fraud measurement.
* Having systems to report to the centre all instances and values of
prevented and detected fraud from across the organisation.
* Having metrics with a financial impact based upon prevented and/or
detected fraud against a baseline.
* Have a programme to test for, and measure, previously undetected and
unreported fraud
A4.9.7 It is good practice to measure the effectiveness of actions taken to reduce
the risk of fraud. Assurances about these measures can be obtained from Internal
Audit fraud loss measurement exercises, stewardship reporting, monitoring, or from
other review bodies.
Reporting fraud
A4.9.8 Public sector organisations should retain records of internal and external
frauds discovered and actions taken, including an assessment of the value of any
losses. They may need to contribute to occasional reports and analysis of frauds.
These should be reported to the centre of the government's Counter Fraud Function
via the Consolidated Data Return
A4.9.9 Public sector organisations should also provide the Counter Fraud Function’s
Centre of Expertise with details, of any novel or unusual frauds (or attempted frauds)
so that this information can be shared more widely. Public sector organisations
should also consider reporting frauds and suspected fraud to the NAO.
103
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0106
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 4.10
Losses and write offs
losses or write off the values of assets, including details of when to notify parliament.
This annex sets out what is expected when departments and their arms length bodies (ALBs) incur
A4.10.1 As parliament does not agree or approve advance provision for potential future
losses when voting money or passing specific legislation, such transactions when
they arise are subject to greater scrutiny and control than other payments. Public
sector organisations should only consider accepting losses and write-offs after
careful appraisal of the facts (including whether all reasonable action has been taken
to effect recovery — see Annex 4.11), and should be satisfied that there is no feasible
alternative. In dealing with individual cases, departments must always consider the
soundness of their internal control systems, the efficiency with which they have been
operated, and take any necessary steps to put failings right.
A4.10.2 The guidance in this chapter relates to cash and fiscal losses. It is not
intended for losses that do not impact on the fiscal position. For example, erroneous
debit balances that result in an accounting adjustment but not a cash loss should
not be disclosed in the losses statement.
Levels of delegation
A4.10.3 Departments have delegated authority to deal with all losses, unless there
are specific delegations put in place, subject to paragraph A4.10.4. Box A4.10A
provides examples of the different categories of loss.
Box A4.10A: examples of losses
Losses
* cash losses: physical losses of cash and its equivalents (eg credit cards, electronic
transfers)
realised exchange rate and hedging losses: losses due to fluctuations in exchange rates
or hedging instruments
losses of pay, allowances and superannuation benefits paid to civil servants, members of
the armed forces and ALB employees: including overpayments due to miscalculation,
misinterpretation, or missing information; unauthorised issues; and other causes
losses arising from overpayments: of social security benefits, grants, subsidies etc
losses arising from failure to make adequate charges: eg for the use of public property.
104
POL-BSFF-0233694_0107
POL00413475
POL00413475
Losses of accountable stores
* _ losses through fraud, theft, arson or any other deliberate act
* losses arising from other causes.
Fruitless payments and constructive losses
Claims waived or abandoned
Consulting the Treasury
4.10.4 When departments identify losses and write-offs, they should consult the
Treasury, using the guidance in Box A4.10B, irrespective of the amount of money
concerned, if they:
* involve important questions of principle;
* raise doubts about the effectiveness of existing systems;
* contain lessons which might be of wider interest;
* are novel or contentious;
* might create a precedent for other departments in similar
circumstances;
* arise because of obscure or ambiguous instructions issued centrally.
A4.10.5 Similarly, ALBs should consult their sponsor departments about similar
cases. In turn departments may need to consult the Treasury.
BoxA4.10B: consulting the Treasury on losses.
Departments should consult the Treasury as soon as possible, outlining:
* the nature of the case, the amount involved and the circumstances in which it arose;
* the reasons for the proposed write-off, including any legal advice;
* the reason for consulting the Treasury;
* — whether fraud (suspected or proven) is involved;
* whether the case resulted from dereliction of duty;
* — whether failure of supervision is involved;
* — whether appropriate legal and/or disciplinary action has been taken against those
involved including supervisors, and, if not, why not;
* — whether those primarily involved will be required to bear any part of the loss; and
* whether the investigation has shown any defects in the existing systems of control and,
* _ ifso, what action will be taken.
Notification to parliament
A4.10.6 Losses should be brought to parliament's attention at the earliest
opportunity, normally by noting the department's annual accounts, whether or not
they may be reduced by subsequent recoveries. For serious losses, departments
105
POL-BSFF-0233694_0108
should also consider the case for a written statement to parliament. Departments
should not hesitate to notify parliament of any losses which it would be proper to
bring to their attention.
Losses and claims records
A4.10.7 Public sector organisations should maintain an up to date record of losses.
The record should show:
+ the nature, gross amount (or estimate where an accurate value is
unavailable), and cause of each loss;
* the action taken, total recoveries and date of write-off where
appropriate; and
* the annual accounts in which each loss is to be noted.
A4.10.8 A losses statement is required in annual accounts where total losses exceed
£300,000. Individual losses of more than £300,000 should be noted separately.
Losses should be reported on an accruals basis.
A4.10.9 Where efforts are still being made to secure recovery of cash losses formally
written off, charged to the accounts and noted, public sector organisations should
consider including them in a record of claims to ensure that recovery is not
overlooked
Accounting for cash losses
4.10.10 Cash losses may initially be accounted for as debtors in annual accounts
pending recovery or write-off.
A4.10.11 When a department incurs a cash loss it should charge it to the
appropriate budget subhead in the Estimate, and for accounts recognise the cost in
accordance with the FReM.
4.10.12 Where a cash loss is wholly or partly recovered by reducing the amounts
of pay or pension’! which would otherwise be due, or under statutory or other
specific powers? only the resulting outstanding balance is treated as a loss to be
written off. The sum(s) are charged to the relevant budget boundary as if they had
been paid to the individual concerned who then used the money to pay the claim.
A4.10.13 Similarly, where the loss is wholly or partly met by voluntary payments by
the person responsible or by a payment from an insurance company or other non-
public source, only the net loss is written off. If, however, there are no powers to
apply the sums withheld by non-issue of pay etc, the gross amount of the loss is
written off.
A4.10.14 Generally, no note is necessary if the net loss is nil by the time the annual
accounts are finalised. There may, however, be exceptions (eg losses arising from
culpable causes) where the circumstances of the loss are such as to make it proper
to bring them to the notice of parliament by inclusion in the Losses Statement.
1 Tax must be deducted from pay or pension subject to PAYE withheld in settlement of a loss, to arrive at the amount attributed to
debt repayment.
2 For example, Queen’s Regulations
106
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0109
POL00413475
POL00413475
Stores losses
4.10.15 Stores losses are, in effect, money spent without the authority of
parliament. In establishing the amount of the loss, and hence whether the annual
account should be noted, the net value of the loss after crediting any sums
recovered will be the determining factor.
44.10.16 Losses of stores arising from culpable causes should be noted in
departmental records, in accordance with normal practice. Such losses should also
be noted in the annual account, to ensure that such losses are brought to the
attention of parliament in the appropriate manner, and to aid departmental
management in managing and accounting for stores.
A4.10.17 Where there is an identifiable claim against some person, the loss need
not be noted immediately. However, if the department subsequently decides to
waive the claim, or finds that it cannot be presented or enforced, the loss should be
treated as an abandoned claim (see paragraph A.4.10.24) and noted accordingly.
4.10.18 Any loss recoverable from a third party, where a decision is taken to waive
recovery because of a knock for knock agreement, should be noted as a stores loss.
4.10.19 Where stores are to be written off, gifted, or transferred to other
departments, they should be valued in accordance with the FReM, unless
circumstances justify exceptional treatment, or other arrangements have been
agreed3.
Fruitless payments
A4.10.20 A fruitless payment is a payment which cannot be avoided because the
recipient is entitled to it even though nothing of use to the department will be
received in return, Some examples are in box A4.10C.
44.10.21 As fruitless payments will be legally due to the recipient, they are not
regarded as special payments. However, as due benefit has not been received in
return, they should be treated as losses, and brought to the attention of parliament
in the same way as stores losses.
Box A4.10C: examples of fruitless payments
A fruitless payment is a payment for which liability ought not to have been incurred, or where the
demand for the goods and services in question could have been cancelled in time to avoid liability, for
example:
* — forfeitures under contracts as a result of some error or negligence by the department;
* payment for travel tickets or hotel accommodation wrongly booked or no longer
needed, or for goods wrongly ordered or accepted;
* the cost of rectifying design faults caused by a lack of diligence or defective professional
practices; and
* extra costs arising from failure to allow for foreseeable changes in circumstances.
3 Stores held by the Ministry of Defence may be valued according to their estimated supply price
107
POL-BSFF-0233694_0110
POL00413475
POL00413475
Constructive losses
A4.10.22 A constructive loss is a similar form of payment to stores losses and
fruitless payments, but one where procurement action itself caused the loss. For
example, stores or services might be correctly ordered, delivered or provided, then
paid for as correct; but later, perhaps because of a change of policy, they might
prove not to be needed or to be less useful than when the order was placed.
44.10.23 Constructive losses need not be noted in the Losses Statement in the
annual accounts unless they are significant.
Claims waived or abandoned
A4.10.24 Losses may arise if claims are waived or abandoned because, though
properly made, it is decided not to present or pursue them. Some examples are in
box A4.10D.
44.10.25 The following should not be treated as claims waived or abandoned
* any claims wrongly identified or presented, whether in error or
otherwise. A claim should not, however, be regarded as withdrawn
where there is doubt as to whether it would succeed if pursued in a
court of law, or if the liability of the debtor has not or cannot be
accurately assessed;
* waivers or remission of tax. HMRC have special rules about remissions
of tax. Departments should consult the Treasury about treatment when
a case arises; or
+ aclaim for a refund of an overpayment which fails or is waived. This
should be regarded as a cash loss.
Box A4.10D: examples of waived and abandoned claims
* where it is decided to reduce the rate of interest on a loan, and therefore to waive the
right to receive the amount of the reduction
* claims actually made and then reduced in negotiations or for policy reasons
* claims which a department intended to make, but which could not be enforced, or
were never presented
* failure to make claims or to pursue them to finality, e.g. owing to procedural delays
allowing the Limitations Acts (annex 4.11.11) to become applicable
* claims arising from actual or believed contractual or other legal obligations which are
not met (whether or not pursued), e.g. under default or liquidated damages clauses of
contracts
* amounts by which claims are reduced by compositions in insolvency cases, or in out-of-
court settlements, other than reductions arising from corrections of facts
* claims dropped on legal advice, or because the amounts of liabilities could not be
determined
* remission of interest on voted loans.
4.10.26 Waivers should be noted in annual accounts in accordance with the FReM.
In addition
108
POL-BSFF-0233694_0111
POL00413475
POL00413475
+ aclaim not presented should normally be noted at its original figure;
* where more than one department is involved, each should note its
records to the extent of its interest, without attempting spurious
accuracy,
There is no need to note annual accounts if claims between departments are waived
or abandoned. These are domestic matters.
109
POL-BSFF-0233694_0112
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 4.11
Overpayments
This annex discusses how, and how far, public sector organisations should seek to recover
overpayments — one case of special payments outside normal parliamentary process (section 4.7). In
difficult cases it is important to act on legal advice.
A4.11.1 Even good payment systems sometimes go wrong. Most organisations responsible
for making payments will sometimes discover that they have made overpayments in
error.In principle public sector organisations should always pursue recovery of
overpayments, irrespective of how they came to be made. In practice, however,
there will be both practical and legal limits to how cases should be handled. So each
case should be dealt with on its merits. Some overpayment scenarios are outlined in
box A4.11A. Where recovery of overpayments is not pursued the guidance in annex
A4.10 should be followed.
Box A4.11A: possible reasons for overpayment
Contractors and suppliers
Overpayments in business transactions should always be pursued, irrespective of cause. It is
acceptable to recover by abating future payments if this approach offers value for money and helps
preserve goodwill. If the contractor resists, the overpaying organisation should consider taking legal
action, taking account of the strength of the case, and of legal advice.
Grants and subsidies
Overpayments to persons or corporate bodies should be treated as business transactions and a full
refund sought. The overpaying organisation should ask recipients to acknowledge the amount of the
debt in writing.
Pay, allowances, pensions
Overpayments to:
* civil servants
* members of the armed forces
* employees of NDPBs
* retired teachers and NHS employees
* and the dependants of any of these
should be pursued, taking proper account of how far recipients have acted in good faith. Similar cases
should be treated consistently. After warning recipients, recovery through deduction from future
salary or pension is often convenient. Legal advice is often wise to make sure that proper account has
been taken of any valid defence against recovery recipients may have.
110
POL-BSFF-0233694_0113
4.11.3 When deciding on appropriate action, taking legal advice, organisations
should consider:
e the type of overpayment;
e whether the recipient accepted the money in good or bad faith;
e the cost-effectiveness of recovery action (either in house or using
external companies). Advice that a particular course of action appears
to offer good value may not be conclusive since it may not take account
of the wider public interest;
any relevant personal circumstances of the payee, including defences
against recovery;
e the length of time since the payment in question was made; and
e — the need to deal equitably with overpayments to a group of people in
similar circumstances.
A4.11.4 It is good practice to consider routinely whether particular cases reveal
concerns about the soundness of the control systems and their operation. It is
important to put failings right.
Payments made with parliamentary authority
A4.11.5 Sometimes overpayments are made using specific legal powers but making
mistakes of fact or law. These are legally recoverable, subject to the provisions of the
Limitation Acts and other defences against recovery (see below). The presumption
should always be that recovery should be pursued, irrespective of the circumstances
in which it arose.
Good faith
A4.11.6 The decision on how far recovery of an overpayment should be pursued in
a particular case will be influenced by whether the recipient has acted in good or
bad faith:
e — where recipients of overpayments have acted in good faith, eg
genuinely believing that the payment was right, they may be able to
use this as a defence (though good faith alone is not a sufficient
defence);
e — where recipients of overpayments have acted in bad faith, recovery of
the full amount overpaid should always be sought.
A4.11.7 Recipients may be inferred to have acted in bad faith if they have wilfully
suppressed material facts or otherwise failed to give timely, accurate and complete
information affecting the amount payable. Other cases, eg those involving
recipients’ carelessness, may require judgement. And some cases may involve such
obvious error, eg where an amount stated is very different from that paid, that no
recipient could reasonably claim to have acted in good faith.
A4.11.8 In forming a judgement about whether payments have been received in
good faith, due allowance should be made for:
e — the complexity of some entitlements, eg to pay or benefits;
111
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0114
«how far the payment depended on changes in the recipient's
circumstances of which he or she was obliged to tell the payer;
e — the extent to which generic information was readily available to help
recipients understand what was likely to be due.
Fraud
A4.11.9 If a public sector organisation is satisfied that the circumstances of an
overpayment involved bad faith on the part of the recipient, it should automatically
consider the possibility of fraud in addition to recovery action. For example, the
recipient may have dishonestly given false information or knowingly failed to
disclose information. If there is evidence of fraudulent intent, prosecution or
disciplinary action should be undertaken where appropriate and practicable. A
criminal conviction in such a case will not eliminate the public debt which had
resulted from the overpayment, and so recovery of the debt should also be pursued
by any available means.
Cost-effectiveness
A4.11.10 Public sector organisations should take decisions about their tactics in
seeking recovery in particular cases on the strength of cost benefit analysis of the
options. Decisions not to pursue recovery should be exceptional and taken only after
careful appraisal of the relevant facts, taking into account the legal position. The
option of abating future payments to the recipient should always be considered.
Defences against recovery
4.11.11 Defences which may be claimed against recovery include:
e the length of time since the overpayment was made
e — change of position
e — estoppel
good consideration
«hardship.
Lapse of time
44.11.12 There can be time limitations on recovery. In England and Wales, a
recipient might plead that a claim is time-barred under the provisions of the
Limitation Acts. Proceedings to recover overpayments must generally be instituted
within six years (twelve years if the claim is against the personal estate of a deceased
person) of discovery of the mistake or the time when the claimant could, with
reasonable diligence, have discovered it.
4.11.13 When public sector organisations claim against a private sector
organisation or people who ignore or dispute the claim, the organisation should
take legal advice about proceeding with the claim in good time so that it does not
become time barred.
A4.11.14 If someone claims that they have overpaid a public sector organisation,
they should be told promptly if the claim is time barred. But if, on its merits, the
112
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0115
recipient organisation decides that there is a case for an ex gratia payment, it should
obtain Treasury consent if the amount involved is outside the organisation's
delegated powers. Similarly, there may be a case for ex gratia payments to make
good underpayments to government employees unless they were dilatory in making
their claims.
Change of position
44.11.15 The recipient of an overpayment may seek to rely on change of position if
he or she has in good faith reacted to the overpayment by relying on it to change
their lifestyle. It might then be inequitable to seek to recover the full amount of the
overpayment. The paying organisation's reaction should depend on the facts of the
case. The onus is on the recipient to show that it would be unfair to repay the
money. This defence is difficult to demonstrate.
Estoppel
44.11.16 A recipient who has changed his or her position may also be able to rely
on the rule of evidence estoppel if the paying organisation misled the recipient
about his or her entitlement, even if the overpayment was caused by a fault on the
part of the recipient. However, a mistaken payment will not normally of itself
constitute a representation that the payee can keep it. There must normally be some
further indication of the recipient's supposed title other than the mere fact of
payment.
A4.11.17 The paying organisation can be prevented from recovery even where it has
made no positive statement to the payee that the latter is entitled to the money
received. If, following a demand for repayment, the recipient can give reasons why
repayment should not be made, then silence from paying organisation would
almost certainly entitle the recipient to conclude that the reply was satisfactory and
that he or she could keep the money.
A4.11.18 It is essential for public sector organisations to seek legal advice where
change of position or estoppel is offered as defence against recovery.
Good consideration
A4.11.19 Another possible defence against recovery is where someone makes a
payment for good consideration, i.e. where the recipient gives something in return
for the payment. For example, payment might be made to discharge a debt; or
where the payment is part of a compromise to deal with an honest claim. If such
payments are later found to be more than was strictly due, the extent to which the
paying organisation was acting in good faith should be taken into account.
Hardship
A4.11.20 Public sector organisations may waive recovery of overpayments where it
is demonstrated that recovery would cause hardship. But hardship should not be
confused with inconvenience. Where the recipient has no entitlement, repayment
does not in itself amount to hardship, especially if the overpayment was discovered
quickly. Acceptable pleas of hardship should be supported by reasonable evidence
that the recovery action proposed by the paying organisation would be detrimental
to the welfare of the debtor or the debtor's family. Hardship is not necessarily
limited to financial hardship; public sector organisations may waive recovery of
113
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0116
POL00413475
POL00413475
overpayments where recovery would be detrimental to the mental welfare of the
debtor or the debtor's family. Again, such hardship must be demonstrated by
evidence.
Collective overpayments
44.11.21 If a group of people have all been overpaid as a result of the same
mistake, the recipients should be treated in the same way. However, that does not
mean that recovery of all such overpayments should be automatically written off.
For example, it may be legitimate to continue to effect recovery from those who
have offered to repay, or some may not be subject to the same level of hardship.
A4.11.22 Public sector organisations should decide how best to handle collective
overpayments so that they do not inhibit the maximum recovery possible. If it is
deemed impractical to pursue recovery from some members of an equivalent group,
there should be no inhibition on pursuing others who may be able to pay. There is
no obligation to inform the group generally about what action is being taken
against particular members since all have the same legal obligation. Any differential
treatment should be based on advice.
A4.11.23 If a public sector organisation is minded to forgo recovery of the whole or
any part of a collective overpayment, it should consult the Treasury (or its sponsor
department, as the case may be) before telling the recipients of the overpayments.
The Treasury will need to be satisfied that a collective waiver is defensible in the
public interest or as value for money. And any such waivers should be exceptional.
114
POL-BSFF-0233694_0117
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 4.12
Gifts
This annex explains how departments should notify parliament of gifts, both given and received. It is
important to assure parliament that propriety has been respected through transparent reporting
A4.12.1 Agift is something voluntarily donated, with no preconditions and without the
expectation of any return. In this document, the term gift includes all transactions
which are economically indistinguishable from gifts: see box A4.12A It is also
important to be clear about transactions which do not score as gifts. For example:
* transfers of assets between government departments should generally
be at full current market value; assets transferred under a transfer of
functions order to implement a machinery of government change are
generally made at no charge. In neither case are such transfers
regarded as gifts;
* grants and grants-in-aid are not gifts as they are made under
legislation, subject to conditions, with some expectation that the
government will receive value through the furtherance of its policy
objectives.
* grants in kind that are part of a planned programme of HMG support
for an organisation or third country (for example, the provision of
equipment in official development assistance projects). Again, there is
an expectation that the government will receive value through the
furtherance of its policy objectives in precisely the same way as with
financial support to a partner organisation or the direct delivery of
projects by government. Such grants in kind will normally be made
under the same legislation that supports other parts of the programme
concerned and the purchase of the equipment concerned will typically
have been financed through provision in the department's Estimate
Box A4.12A: definition of gifts
Gifts include all transactions economically equivalent to free and unremunerated transfers from
departments to others, such as:
* loan of an asset for its expected useful life
* — sale or lease of assets at below market value (the difference between the amount
received and the market value is the value of the gift)
115
POL-BSFF-0233694_0118
POL00413475
POL00413475
* — donations by departments
* transfers of land and buildings, or assignment of leases, to private sector bodies at less
than market price (the gift is valued at the difference between the price agreed and the
market price).
Approval
A4.12.3 Treasury approval is needed for all gifts valued at more than £300,000,
and any other gifts not covered by a department's or ALB’s delegated authorities.
ALBs should consult their sponsor departments about gifts.
A4.12.4 The WMS and minute must then be laid before the House of Commons, on
the same day, at least fourteen parliamentary sitting days before the department
proposes to make the gift. In cases of special urgency, it is permissible,
exceptionally, for all or part of the fourteen day notice period to fall during an
adjournment or recess, or for a shorter notice period to be given. In such cases, with
Treasury approval, the reasons for urgency should be explained
A4.12.5 The WMS and minute must contain the standard opening and closing
paragraphs in box A4.12B. These terms have the PAC’s endorsement and can be
changed only with Treasury approval.
Box A4.12B: standard paragraphs for written ministerial statement and departmental
minute
Opening paragraph:
It is the normal practice when a government department proposes to make a gift of a value exceeding
£300,000, for the department concerned to present to the House of Commons a minute giving
particulars of the gift and explaining the circumstances; and to refrain from making the gift until
fourteen parliamentary sitting days after the issue of the minute, except in cases of special urgency.
Closing paragraph
The Treasury has approved the proposal in principle. If, during the period of fourteen parliamentary
sitting days beginning on the date on which this minute was laid before the House of Commons, a
Member signifies an objection by giving notice of a Parliamentary Question or a Motion relating to the
minute, or by otherwise raising the matter in the House, final approval of the gift will be withheld
pending an examination of the objection.
4.12.6 The WMS and minute should also set out briefly the nature of the gift, its
value, the circumstances in which it is being given, and the recipient. Where the gift
is to be replaced, information about the cost and nature of the replacement, when
it is expected to be acquired, and the Estimate to which the expenditure will be
charged should be included. In the case of non-voted expenditure, the account to
which the replacement cost will be charged should be quoted.
Parliamentary objections
A4.12.7 Members of Parliament may object to gifts by letter, Parliamentary Question
or through an Early Day Motion. In such cases, departments may wish to advise
their ministers to take the initiative by making contact with the MP concerned. This
116
POL-BSFF-0233694_0119
POL00413475
POL00413475
may be particularly appropriate if it is proposed to make the gift urgently or
promptly on expiry of the waiting period.
A4.12.8 Where an objection is raised, the gift should not normally be made until
the objection has been answered. In the case of an Early Day Motion, the MP should
be given an opportunity to make a direct personal representation to the Minister.
The Treasury should be notified of the outcome of any representations made by
MPs.
Noting annual accounts
A4.12.9 Annual accounts should include a note on gifts made by departments if
their total value exceeds £300,000. Gifts with a value of more than £300,000
should be noted individually, with a reference to the appropriate WMS and
departmental minute. Exceptionally, where gifts are made between government
departments, the receiving department should notate its accounts, not the donor.
Gifts received
44.12.10 Departments should maintain a register detailing gifts they have received,
their estimated value and what happened to them (whether they were retained,
disposed of, etc). Gifts received need not be noted in accounts unless the Treasury
or department concerned considers there is a special need for them to be brought
to parliament's attention.
44.12.11 Donations, sponsorship or contributions, eg from developers should also
be treated as gifts.
A4.12.12 Guidance on gifts made to individual civil servants is in the Civil Service
Management Code’.
V https: .gov.uk/government/oublications/civil-servants-terms-and-conditions
117
POL-BSFF-0233694_0120
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 4.13
Special payments
This annex explains how public sector organisations should approach current transactions outside the
usual planned range. It is often right, or essential, to consult the Treasury beforehand. In some cases,
it is also important to notify parliament.
A4.13.1 In voting money or passing specific legislation, parliament does not and cannot
approve special payments outside the normal range of departmental activity. Such
transactions are therefore subject to greater control than other payments.
A4.13.2 Departments should authorise special payments only after careful appraisal
of the facts and when satisfied that the best course has been identified. It is good
practice to consider routinely whether particular cases reveal concerns about the
soundness of the control systems; and whether they have been respected as
expected. It is also important to take any necessary steps to put failings right.
A4.13.3 Arm’s length bodies should operate to similar standards as departments
unless there are good reasons to the contrary, eg overriding requirements of the
statutory framework for Companies Act companies. Departments should ensure that
their oversight arrangements (see chapter 7) enable them to be satisfied that their
arm’s length bodies observe the standards.
Dealing with special payments
A4.13.4 Departments should always consult the Treasury about special payments
unless there are specific agreed delegation arrangements in place (See Annex 2.2).
So a department should seek Treasury approval, in advance, for any special payment
for which it has no delegated authority, or which exceeds its authority. Similarly,
ALBs should consult their sponsor departments in comparable circumstances. In
turn, the department may need to consult the Treasury.
4.13.5 The special payments on which the Treasury may need to be consulted are
summarised in box A4.13A. The list is not exclusive. If a department is in doubt, it is
usually better to consult the Treasury.
A4.13.6 In particular, it is inportant to consult the Treasury about any cases,
irrespective of delegations, which:
* involve important questions of principle;
* raise doubts about the effectiveness of existing systems;
* contain lessons which might be of wider interest;
118
POL-BSFF-0233694_0121
POL00413475
POL00413475
* might create a precedent for other departments;
* may be deemed novel, contentious, or repercussive; or
* arise because of obscure or ambiguous instructions issued centrally.
Box A4.13A: special payments
* extra-contractual payments: payments which, though not legally due under contract,
appear to place an obligation on a public sector organisation which the courts might
uphold. Typically these arise from the organisation’s action or inaction in relation to a
contract. Payments may be extra-contractual even where there is some doubt about
the organisation’s liability to pay, eg where the contract provides for arbitration but a
settlement is reached without it. (A payment made as a result of an arbitration award is
contractual.)
* extra-statutory and extra-regulatory payments are within the broad intention of the
statute or regulation, respectively, but go beyond a strict interpretation of its terms.
* compensation payments are made to provide redress for personal injuries (except for
payments under the Civil Service Injury Benefits Scheme), traffic accidents, damage to
property etc, suffered by civil servants or others. They include other payments to those
in the public service outside statutory schemes or outside contracts.
* special severance payments are paid to employees, contractors and others outside of
normal statutory or contractual requirements when leaving employment in public
service whether they resign, are dismissed or reach an agreed termination of contract.
* exgratia payments go beyond statutory cover, legal liability, or administrative rules,
including:
payments made to meet hardship caused by official failure or delay
out of court settlements to avoid legal action on grounds of official inadequacy
payments to contractors outside a binding contract, eg on grounds of hardship.
A4.13.7 The Treasury does not condemn all special payments out of hand. Each
needs to be justified properly in the public interest against the key public sector
principles set out in Chapter 1, box 1.1, with particular emphasis on value for money
since there is no legal liability. Any proposal to keep a special payment confidential
must be justified especially carefully since confidentiality could appear to mask
underhand dealing. Also financial reporting requirements and Freedom of
Information legislation should be complied with. The Treasury's bottom line is
usually to ask the department to establish that the responsible accounting officer(s)
would feel able to justify the proposed payment in parliament if challenged
A4.13.8 Departments should also consult the Treasury about proposals for special
payments above the relevant delegated limits. They should explain:
* the nature and circumstances of the case;
* the amount involved;
* the legal advice, where appropriate;
+ the management procedures followed;
119
POL-BSFF-0233694_0122
* an assessment of the value for money of the case
* any non-financial aspects;
* whether the case in question could have wider impact.
Severance Payments
4.13.9 Special severance payments when staff leave public service employment
should be exceptional. They always require Treasury approval because they are
usually novel, contentious and potentially repercussive. So departments should
always consult the Treasury in advance when considering a special severance
payment.
A4.13.10 The Treasury adopts a sceptical approach to proposals for special
severance settlements, in particular:
* precedents from other parts of the public sector may not be a reliable
guide in any given case;
+ legal advice that a particular severance payment appears to offer good
value for the employer may not be conclusive since such advice may not
take account of the wider public interest;
* even if the cost of defeating an apparently frivolous or vexatious appeal
will exceed the likely cost of that particular settlement to the employer,
it may still be desirable to take the case to formal proceeding;
* winning such cases demonstrates that the government does not reward
failure and should enhance the employer's reputation for prudent use
of public funds
Severance payments will only be approved where they provide value for
money for the Exchequer as a whole, rather than simply for the body
concerned.
44.13.11 Departments should not treat special severance as a soft option, eg to
avoid management action, disciplinary processes, unwelcome publicity or
reputational damage. Box A4.13B sets out the factors the Treasury needs to evaluate
in dealing with special severance cases
A4.13.12 It is important to ensure that Treasury approval is sought before any
offers, whether oral or in writing, are made. A proforma for seeking Treasury
approval is available’.
A4.13.13 Departments and their ALBs are also required to seek ministerial approval
(including the approval of the Minister for the Cabinet Office) of confidentiality
clauses in certain circumstances. Cabinet Office guidance on the use and approval of
such agreements is also available2.
1 httosuswww.gov.ul/government/oublications/managing-public- money
2 httos:/Awwnw_gov.ul/government/oublications/civi-service-settlement-agreements-special-severance-payments-and-confidentiality-
clauses
120
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0123
POL00413475
POL00413475
Box A4.13B: factors to consider in special severance cases
Any case for special severance put to the treasury should explain:
* the circumstances of the case
* any scope for reference to a tribunal with its potential consequences, including the legal
assessment of the organisation’s chances of winning or losing the case and likely scale
of any award
* the management procedures followed
* the value for money offered by the possible settlement
* any non-financial considerations, eg where it is desirable to end someone's employment
without dismissal, perhaps because of restructuring
* — whether the case could have wider impact, eg for a group of potential tribunal cases
44.13.14 Particular care should be taken to:
* avoid unnecessary delays which might lead to greater severance
payments than might otherwise be merited;
* avoid offering the employee concerned consultancy work after
severance unless best value for money can be demonstrated and the
proposal is in line with Cabinet Office approvals and controls3;
* ensure any undertakings about confidentiality leave severance
transactions open to adequate public scrutiny, including by the NAO
and the PAC;
* ensure special severance payments to senior staff are transparent and
negotiated avoiding conflicts of interest
44.13.15 Organisations seeking retrospective Treasury approval for special severance
payments should not take it for granted that approval will be provided, since such
payments usually appear to reward failure and set a poor example for the public
sector generally. Requests for retrospective approval will be considered as if the
request had been made at the proper time and should contain the same level of
detail as if the case had been brought to the Treasury in advance.
Retention Payments
A4.13.16 Retention payments, designed to encourage staff to delay their
departures, particularly where transformations of ALBs are being negotiated, are
also classified as novel and contentious. Such payments always require explicit
Treasury approval, whether proposed in individual cases or in groups. Treasury
approval must be obtained before any commitment, whether oral or in writing, is
made.
44.13.17 Organisations considering proposals for retention payments should
subject them to strict value for money analysis. Sponsor departments should submit
a business case to the Treasury, supported by market evidence, together with an
3 hetpsi/mmw.gov.uk/government/oublications/cabinet-office-controls
121
POL-BSFF-0233694_0124
POL00413475
POL00413475
evaluation of the risks and costs of alternative options. The Treasury will always be
sceptical of whether they are necessary.
Reporting
A4.13.18 As parliament does not provide for special payments when voting
Estimates or passing specific legislation, special payments should be brought to
parliament's attention, usually through a note in the organisation’s account. Any
special severance payments for senior staff will in any case be itemised in annual
accounts.
44.13.19 Notification is separate from accounting treatment, which will depend on
the nature of the special payment. Special payments should be noted in the
accounts even if they may be reduced by subsequent recoveries.
44.13.20 Special payments should be noted in annual accounts where the total
value exceeds £300,000. Individual payments of more than £300,000 should be
noted separately.
Reporting to Cabinet Office
4.13.21 Departments and their ALBs are required to report to the Minister for the
Cabinet Office on a quarterly basis any special severance payment made in
connection with the termination of employment. These returns will enable Cabinet
Office to provide assurance on whether the use of special severance payments across
the Civil Service is both proportionate and appropriate, including the use of any
confidentiality clauses alongside such payments. A pro forma is available+
Civil Service-wide data on special severance payments will be published annually by
the Cabinet Office.
4 https:/mw.gov.uk/government/oublications/civil-service-settlement-agreements-special-severance-payments-and-confidentiality-
clauses
122
POL-BSFF-0233694_0125
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 4.14
Remedy
Prompt and efficient complaint handling is an important way of ensuring customers receive the
service to which they are entitled and may save public sector organisations time and money by
preventing a complaint escalating unnecessarily.
If their services have been found deficient, public sector organisations should consider whether to
provide remedies to people or firms who complain. This is separate from administering statutory
rights or other legal obligations, eg to make payments to compensate. Remedies may take several
different forms and should be proportionate and appropriate.
Dealing with complaints
4.14.1 Public sector organisations should operate clear accessible complaints procedures.
They are a valuable source of feedback which can help shed light on the quality of
service provided, and in particular how well it matches up to policy intentions. So all
complaints should be investigated. The Parliamentary and Health Service
Ombudsman (PHSO) has published Principles of good complaint handling! to help
public bodies when dealing with complaints.Systems for dealing with complaints
should operate promptly and consistently. Those making complaints should be told
how quickly their complaints can be processed. Where groups of complaints raise
common issues, the remedies offered should be fair, consistent and proportionate.
A4.14.3 Public sector organisations should seek to learn from their complaints. If an
internal or external review, or a PHSO investigation, shows there are systemic faults,
defective systems or procedures should be overhauled and corrected.
Remedies
4.14.4 As section 4.11 explains, when public sector organisations have caused
injustice or hardship because of maladministration or service failure, they should
consider:
* providing remedies so that, as far as reasonably possible, they restore
the wronged party to the position that they would be in had things
been done correctly, and
+ whether policies and procedures need change, to prevent the failure
reoccurring.
7 httpy/www.ombudsman.org.uk/imoroving-public-service/ombudsmansorinciples/orincioles-of-qood-complaint-handling-full
123
POL-BSFF-0233694_0126
POL00413475
POL00413475
The remedies available
4.14.5 Remedies can take a variety of forms, including (alone or in combination)
* an apology;
* an explanation;
* correction of the error or other remedial action;
* an undertaking to improve procedures or systems; or
* financial payments, eg one off or as part of a structured settlement.
A4.14.6 Financial remedies for individual cases are normally ex gratia payments.
Where a pattern develops, and a number of cases raising similar points need to be
dealt with, it may make sense to develop an extra statutory scheme (see annex
4.13). If any such scheme seems likely to persist, the organisation concerned should
consider whether to bring forward legislation to set it on a statutory footing (see
sections 2.5 and 2.6)
Designing remedies
A4.14.7 The normal approach to complaints where no financial payment is called
for is to offer an apology and an explanation. This may be a sufficient and
appropriate response in itself. People complaining may also want reassurance that
mistakes will not be repeated
A4.14.8 It may be more difficult to judge whether financial compensation is called
for, and if so how much, especially if there is no measurable financial detriment
Great care should be taken in designing financial compensation schemes since they
may set expensive precedents.
A4.14.9 Where financial remedies are identified as the right approach to service
failure, they should be fair, reasonable and proportionate to the damage suffered by
those complaining. Financial remedies should not, however, allow recipients to gain
a financial advantage compared to what would have happened with no service
failure. Consideration should always be given by the public sector organisation that
the circumstances of a complaint do not involve bad faith on the part of the
complainant, and the possibility of fraudulent intent.
44.14.10 Public sector organisations deciding on financial remedies should take into
account all the relevant factors. Some which are often worth considering are
outlined in box A4.14A. The list may not be exhaustive.
Box A4.14A: factors to consider in deciding whether financial compensation is
appropriate
* Whether a loss has been caused by failure to pay an entitlement, eg to a grant or
benefit.
* Whether someone has faced any additional costs as a result of the action or inaction of
a public sector organisation, eg because of delay.
* Whether the process of making the complaint has imposed costs on the person
complaining, eg lost earnings or costs of pursuing the complaint.
124
POL-BSFF-0233694_0127
POL00413475
POL00413475
* The circumstances of the person complaining, eg whether the action or inaction of the
public sector organisation has caused knock on effects or hardship.
* Whether the damage is likely to persist for some time.
* Whether any financial remedy would be taxable when paid to the person complaining.
* — Any advice from the PHSO.
44.14.11 If a compensation payment includes an element because the person
complaining has had to wait for their award, it should be calculated as simple
interest. The interest rate to be applied should be appropriate to the circumstances
and defensible against the facts. Some rates worth considering are the rate HMRC
pays on tax repayments and the rate used in court settlements.
44.14.12 When a public sector organisation recognises that it needs a scheme for a
set of similar or connected claims after maladministration or service failure, it should
ensure that the arrangements chosen deal with all potential claimants equitably. It is
important that such schemes take into account the PHSO’s Principles of good
administration2. They must be well designed since costs can escalate if a problem
turns out to be more extensive than initially expected.
A4.14.13 If those seeking compensation have suffered injustice or hardship in a way
which is likely to persist, it may not be appropriate to pay compensation as a lump
sum. Instead it may make sense to award a structured settlement with periodic (eg
monthly or annual) payments. Public sector organisations considering such
settlements should seek both legal and actuarial advice in drawing them up.
A4.14.14 Essentially, designing a compensation scheme is no different from
designing other services. Good management, efficiency, effectiveness and value for
money are key goals (see Chapter 4). Some specific issues which may require special
care for compensation schemes are outlined in box A4.14B
Box A4.14B: Issues to consider in designing compensation schemes
* — Clarify the coverage of the scheme.
* — Set clear scheme rules, with supporting guidance, to implement the policy intention.
* Make the remedies fair and proportionate, avoiding bias, discrimination or prejudice
* Ensure the scheme’s systems work, eg through pilot testing.
* Design in sufficient flexibility to cope with the characteristics of the claimant population.
* — Check that the administration cost is not excessive — or simplify the scheme.
* Ifthe scheme sets a precedent, make sure that it is acceptable generally.
¢ Inform parliament appropriately, eg through a written statement and/or in the
estimates / annual accounts.
* Plan to evaluate the scheme at suitable point(s).
* Provide for closure of the scheme, unless there is good reason not to
2 httpy/wwnw.ombudsman.org.uk/improving-public-service/ombudsmansorinciples/orincioles-of-good-administration
125
POL-BSFF-0233694_0128
POL00413475
POL00413475
Consulting the Treasury
4.14.15 When considering making individual remedy payments, departments need
to consult the Treasury (and sponsored bodies need to consult their sponsor
departments) about cases which
* fall outside their delegated authorities; or
* raise novel or contentious issues; or
* could set a potentially expensive precedent or cause repercussions for
other public sector organisations.
44.14.16 Public sector organisations developing schemes to pay remedies should
consult the Treasury before finalising them. Proposed schemes drawn up in response
to a PHSO recommendation also require Cabinet Office approval. Once a scheme is
agreed, it is only necessary to consult the Treasury further about cases outside the
agreed boundaries for the scheme, or the delegated authority applying to it.
Reporting ex gratia payments
44.14.17 Departments should ensure that ex gratia payments have Estimate cover,
and that the ambit of the vote concerned is wide enough for the purpose. Ex gratia
payments score as special payments in departments’ accounts. Departments and
agencies should include summary information on compensation payments arising
from maladministration in their annual reports.
126
POL-BSFF-0233694_0129
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 4.15
Asset management
Each public sector organisation is expected to develop and operate an asset management strategy
underpinned by a reliable and up to date asset register. The board should review the strategy annually
as part of the corporate or business plan.
A4.15.1 A4.15.1 Accounting officers of public sector organisations are responsible
for managing their assets. This aspect of financial management covers the
acquisition, use, maintenance, and disposal of assets for the benefit of the
organisations and indeed for the Exchequer as whole.
A4.15.2 Each organisation needs to have a clear grasp of:
. the content of its current assets base;
. the assets it needs to deliver efficient, cost effective public services;
. what this means for asset acquisition, use, maintenance, renewal, upgrade
and disposal;
. whether any gains could be achieved by working with other public sector
organisations;
. how use of assets fits within the corporate plan
A4.15.3 A4.15.3 Normally, these responsibilities will be dispersed in an organisation
through a system of delegations with appropriate reporting arrangements. Similarly,
departments should ensure that each of their sponsored organisations has
equivalent arrangements.
Asset registers
A4.15.4 A4.15.4 It is good practice for each organisation to draw up, and keep up
to date, a register of all the assets it owns and uses. This will usually be needed for
preparation of its financial accounts. It is also essential to undertake regular stock
taking of the organisation's current assets base and thus for planning change.
A4.15.5 The assets on an organisation's register should include both tangible and
intangible assets, covering both owned assets and assets under its legal control
such as leased or private finance assets. Box A.4.15A lists the main groups of
assets but is not exhaustive. Each organisation should decide on a meaningful
valuation threshold in line with best practice.
A4.15.6 In drawing up the asset register, particular care should be taken with two
sorts of asset:
. attractive items, such as works of art and items similarly susceptible to
theft. These may be included even if they are below the valuation threshold, in
line with guidance provided by the Government Art Collection; and
127
POL-BSFF-0233694_0130
POL00413475
POL00413475
investments in the form of debentures and shares in commercial companies. These should be
checked at least annually.
tangible assets
wholly owned land and buildings
leased fixed assets (including those
acquired through private finance)
raw materials
stocks and stores
plant, machinery, equipment, tools
furniture and fittings
assets under construction
donated physical assets
heritage assets
antiques and works of art
economic infrastructure assets (including
highways, railways, airports, utilities
communication networks and power
generation and transmission)
Box A4.15A: main categories of public sector assets
intangible assets
copyrights, including Crown copyright
trademarks
franchises
patents and other intellectual property
rights, including in house software
goodwill
data and information
knowledge and know-how
software licences
public dividend capital
loans and deposits
investments including shares and
debentures in companies
Asset management strategies
A4.15.7 The asset management strategy of a public sector organisation should be integrated
into its corporate and annual business plans. It should thus be possible to help plan change in
asset use or deployment when necessary. Box A.4.15B suggests some key steps. The
organisation's board should take stock of progress in delivering its asset management strategy
from time to time, and at least annually.
Box A4.15B: steps for developing asset management plans
Review the asset register to assess its adequacy for the organisation's objectives and functions.
Plan how retained assets will be used efficiently for the organisation's core functions.
Plan asset acquisitions, e.g. to extend, modify or replace the existing asset base.
Identify disposals, and plan to use the proceeds. Once decided upon, disposals should be as
swift as the market will allow with reasonable value for money). Treasury approval is required for
spending or retaining receipts.
Plan any loans of assets, with charges and conditions for their return, liability, damage.
128
POL-BSFF-0233694_0131
POL00413475
POL00413475
Consider whether any retained assets have potential to generate revenue through commercial
services.
A4.15.8 Assets should be managed like other parts of organisation’s business, with up to date
and reliable information systems to provide feedback on performance, efficiency and value for
money. The organisation is expected to:
view value for money from the asset from the perspective of the whole Exchequer,
taking account of opportunities to work with other public sector organisations to
minimise the government's overall required asset base;
manage the assets in a way which aims to optimise cost sustainability through their
effective lives;
use commercial terms for the delivery and support of assets;
incorporate adequate flexibility to cope with the organisation's future change
programme.
Efficiency improvements
A4.15.9 Efficiency in the use of workspace may make it possible for a public sector organisation
to occupy less space. It is good practice to dispose of surplus property, or to share
accommodation on the civil estate with other public sector organisations where this is
practicable. It may be necessary to consider a budget transfer between organisations, with
Treasury consent, to help meet the initial relocation costs.
A4.15.10 Prior to marketing any land or building asset, public sector organisations should also
make use of the following:
“Disposal of Surplus Public Sector Land and Buildings — Protocols for Land holding
Departments”! which describes the procedures to be followed to dispose of land
with development potential;
The Cabinet Office’s National Property Controls which detail the rules on lease
extensions, lease renewals, acquisitions, disposals as well as required space
standards associated with major refurbishments of buildings;
The Register of Surplus Land, part of ePIMS (electronic Property Management
Information Mapping Service), a mandatory central database recording information
on the civil estate. The data base does not cover leasehold property with less than
99 years outstanding;
the Civil Estate Occupancy Agreement governing relationships among Crown
bodies sharing accommodation and the Civil Estate Coordination Protocol which is
designed to improve the planning, acquisition, management, rationalisation and
disposal of property and other workspace on the civil estate;
latest guidance and advice available from the Government Property Unit.
" httosy/mww.gov.uk/government/oublications/disoosal-of-surplus-public-sector-land-and-buildings-orotocol-for-land-holding-deoart ments
129
POL-BSFF-0233694_0132
POL00413475
POL00413475
Asset Sales
A4.15.11 When undertaking an asset sale, departments should follow the Asset Sales Disclosure
Guidance. The guidance requires government departments to disclose the impacts of an asset
sale on Public Sector Net Borrowing (PSNB), Public Sector Net Debt (PSND), Public Sector Net
Financial Liabilities (PSNFL) and Public Sector Net Liabilities (PSNL), as well as disclosing the
proceeds and whether the sale was above, within or below the retention value range.
Departments should also include a rationale for the sale, as well as justification for its format
and timing, and include these alongside the impacts in a Written Ministerial Statement laid in
Parliament after the sale.
Transfer of property
A4.15.12 Public sector organisations may transfer property among themselves without placing
the asset on the open market, provided they do so at market prices and in appropriate
circumstances. They should follow the guidelines in box A4.15C.
Box A4.15C: protocol for transfers of assets
* Consult ePIMS to see if properties on the civil estate can be used.
* Value assets at market prices using Royal Institute Chartered Surveyors’ Red Book (www.rics.org)
* The original and prospective owners should work collaboratively to agree a price. It is good
practice to commission a single independent valuation to settle the price to be paid.
* The organisations should take legal advice, especially where sponsored organisations are involved
as these may have specific legal requirements.
* There is no need for full investigation of legal title since full transfer is rarely necessary because of
the indivisibility of the Crown.
* Consult the Government Property Unit of the Cabinet Office, who may be able to help with
coordination.
* — The terms of transfer should not normally involve neither clawback (rights to share disposal
proceeds) or overage (rights to share future profits on disposal) though see A4.15.13 below.
A4.15.13 Sometimes transfers of assets result from machinery of government changes. The
relevant legislation (eg a transfer of functions order) should prescribe the terms of any such
transfers
44.15.14 In certain limited circumstances overage provisions can be considered. The
circumstances where overage is acceptable are:
* where the property is sold to a private developer for housing development;
* there is a realistic prospect that selling will improve the outcome for housing policy,
e.g. by creating an aggregated composite site;
+ the accounting officers of the relevant public sector organisations are convinced
that, in this transaction, overage offers value for money for the Exchequer as a
whole; and
+ the Treasury agrees (these transaction are always novel and contentious)
130
POL-BSFF-0233694_0133
POL00413475
POL00413475
A4.15.15 In addition, the overage provisions may be agreed by a central government purchaser
of property where it is a condition of the sale of that property by a local government or
devolved administration body. In all cases the purchase must represent value for money for the
Exchequer as a whole and Treasury consent should be sought
Disposals of property and land assets
A4.15.16 Public sector organisations should take professional advice when disposing of land
and property assets. Some key guidelines are in box A4.15D
Box A4.15D: protocol for disposal of land, property and other assets
* Value assets at market prices using Royal Institute of Chartered Surveyors’ Red Book
(www. tics.org).
* Dispose of surplus land property within three years.
* Dispose of surplus residential property within six months
* Sell plant, machinery, office equipment, furniture and consumable stores by public auction as
seen; or by open tender. Obtain payment before releasing the goods.
* If an asset is sold or leased at a loss, the proceeds forgone (compared to market value) should be
treated as a gift, and the routine in annex 4.12 should be followed.
A4.15.17 Sometimes private finance projects involve disposals. Each such case should be
evaluated as part of the private finance project, with due attention to the need to secure good
value for money. Further guidance is an annex 7.4.
A4.15.18 Public sector organisations which make grants to third parties for the acquisition of
assets should normally include a clawback condition under which they can recoup the proceeds
if the recipient of the grant later sells the asset. There is some scope for flexibility in this
discipline: see annex 5.2
A4.15.19 Disposals to charities require particular care. Their trust deeds sometimes place
restrictions on how they may use their assets. It is good practice to consider the possible
disposal of assets by such recipients before making gifts to them.
Economic infrastructure assets
A4.15.20 Managing economic infrastructure affects the quality of delivery of services. It is also
central to achievement of the national infrastructure goals detailed in the National Infrastructure
Plan. These factors need to be incorporated into the business plans and objectives of public
sector organisations which hold, use and manage such assets.
44.15.21 Good asset management of economic infrastructure thus calls for the responsible
organisations to coordinate their own and their stakeholders’ objectives. Sometimes securing
value for money for the taxpayer means compromise between cost, risks, opportunities and
performance. Finding the right solution can affect organisations’ long-term plans, their
prioritisation of resources and work to achieve realism in stakeholder expectations, as set out in
the National Infrastructure Plan.
131
POL-BSFF-0233694_0134
POL00413475
POL00413475
Central asset registers
A4.15.22 From time to time government gathers information in order to publish a national
assets register. Central government organisations and NHS bodies should supply the
information on their assets when requested.
A4.15.23 Under Crown copyright policy, certain public sector organisations are required to
supply details for the official bibliographic database. See annex 6.2 for further details.
Digest of guidance
Office of Government Property (Cabinet Office) -
https:/Awww.gov.uk/government/policy-teams/government-property-unit-ogp
Government's Estate Strategy: delivering a modern estate —
https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/government-estate-strategy-2018
Common Minimum Standards for Construction
https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/common-minimum-standards-for-
construction
recording property details on the government's ePIMS (electronic Property
Information System)
https://www.epims.ogc.gov.uk/ProgrammeHub/public/DAO%2OLetter%20Mandati
ng%20e-PIMS.pdf?id=258687de-b5ce-4d28-9430-1e259c56897b
Property disposal - https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/quide-for-the-
disposal-of-surplus-government-land
Crichel Down rules — offering land and property acquired by the public sector back
for former owners - https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/compulsory-
purchase-process-and-the-crichel-down-rules-guidance#historyC
Disposal of Heritage Assets https://historicengland.org.uk/images-
books/publications/disposal-heritage-assets/guidance-disposals-final-jun-10,
132
POL-BSFF-0233694_0135
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 5.1
Grants
This annex sets out how government departments should arrange and control grants, including to
arm’s length bodies such as NDPBs.
A5.1.1 Central government departments normally offer two kinds of financial support to
third parties, using statutory powers:
¢ grants: made for specific purposes, under statute, and satisfying specific
conditions eg about project terms, or with other detailed control;
¢ grants in aid: providing more general support, usually for an NDPB, with
fewer specific, but more general controls on the body, and less oversight by
the funder.
A5.1.2 Grants should not be confused with contracts. A public sector organisation
funds by grant as a matter of policy, not in return for services provided under
contract.
Payment
A5.1.3 Grants should be paid on evidence of need or qualification, depending on
the terms of the grant scheme. For example:
¢ the recipient may need to demonstrate financial viability and delivery
capability;
¢ the recipient may need to submit a claim with evidence of eligibility;
¢ the recipient may need to show that it meets the conditions of the
scheme, eg a farmer may need to disclose details of his or her business;
¢ there may be a timing condition;
¢ small third sector organisations may need to demonstrate a clear
operational requirement for project funding to be made before grant is
paid.
A5.1.4 Grants in aid should also match the recipient's need. Significant sums should
be phased through the year in instalments designed to echo the recipient's
expenditure pattern. In this way the recipient organisation need not carry significant
cash balances, which would be an inefficient use of public money.
Control
A5.1.5 Payment of both grants and grants in aid normally requires specific
empowering legislation as well as cover in Estimates. There is scope for temporary ex
133
POL-BSFF-0233694_0136
gratia grant schemes to be financed on the authority of the Appropriation Act alone
provided that the scheme meets the standard conditions (see section 2.5).
A5.1.6 The accounting officer of the funding organisation is responsible for
ensuring that grant recipients are eligible and use the grant in the way envisaged in
the founding legislation, with terms and conditions set out in a grant funding
agreement. For grants in aid, it is usual to arrange this by setting out terms and
conditions in a framework document sent to recipients to explain their
responsibilities. Such framework documents should strike an appropriate balance
among
¢ ensuring prudent management of grant in aid funds;
e achieving value for money;
e assuring funders that grants are used as envisaged; while
¢ allowing recipients reasonable freedom to take their own decisions.
However, care needs to be taken as general and wide ranging conditions attached
to grant in aid can transfer control of a body to a funder for public sector
classification purposes.
A5.1.7 Accounting Officers should ensure that all grants issued comply with the
Government Functional Standard for grants. 1
A5.1.8 Departments should understand enough about the other sources of a grant
recipient's income to be satisfied that the same need is not funded twice, this
should include an internal and cross-government check of grant funding awards. It
is usually essential to segregate inflows from different recipients since they are
usually intended for different purposes.
A5.1.9 Departments which provide grants of either kind to an arm’s length body
should document how the recipient is expected to handle the funds. See annex 7.2
for more.
A5.1.10 Departments should ensure that they have adequate assurance
arrangements in place, which take account of an assessment of fraud risk, and that
the Comptroller and Auditor General has adequate access rights to grant recipients.
A5.1.11 A department asked by another part of government to pay a grant to an
external organisation, such as a charity, from its own resources should ensure that
its own accounting officer gives due consideration to the proposal before funding is
committed
Protecting the Exchequer
A5.1.12 If public sector organisations provide grants to private sector organisations
to acquire or develop assets, suitable and proportionate steps should be taken to
safeguard both their financial interests and those of the Exchequer. Donors should
consider setting grant conditions designed to ensure that the Exchequer’s interest is
not overlooked if the asset is not used as expected (see annex 5.2).
1 https:/www.gov.uk/government/publications/grants-standards
134
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0137
Endowments
A5.1.13 Grants and grants in aid are normally paid to meet the needs of the
recipients. Exceptionally, there may be a case for funding by way of endowment or
dowry, ie a modest one-off grant to enable the recipient to set up a fund from
which to draw down over several years. The recipient should then be able to make a
clean break with the need for support
AS5.1.14 A5.1.14 Departments contemplating such funding arrangements should
consult the relevant Treasury spending team (and in turn arm's length bodies should
consult their sponsor departments) as this form of funding is always novel and
contentious. The Treasury will need to consider the value for money case for this
form of funding, including:
e the opportunity cost of locking public funds into a particular endowment,
using investment appraisal techniques;
¢ the value of the particular programme or project against others. The
Treasury will need to be satisfied that such funding would not protect any
low-value projects or programmes from proper expenditure scrutiny;
e the sustainability of the funded body and whether such funding will remove
future reliance on public funding;
« whether there are clear objectives, outputs and outcomes of the funding;
and
e the risk of further call on public funds.
A5.1.15 Any such endowment should:
e reflect genuine need for capital funding that could not be raised through
other methods;
e be made only to recipients with the competence to manage the endowment
over time; and
e avoid skewing public funding away from other projects that have genuine
cash needs.
A5.1.16 The terms of an endowment should:
¢ be clear that the funded body should not subsequently approach the donor
for annual funding;
¢ maintain clear boundaries between the funder and recipient.
A5.1.17 Endowments should never be used as a way of bringing expenditure
forward to avoid an underspend. Nor is it acceptable to make a string of
endowment payments to a single recipient instead of taking specific provision in
legislation to pay grants.
A5.1.18 Endowments are intended for situations where a clear financial break will
be advantageous to both recipient and donor. Normally the recipient will be a civil
society body or equivalent status.
135
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0138
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 5.2
Protecting the Exchequer interest
(clawback)
This annex discusses how public sector organisations which provide grants to the private sector and
others should protect their investments where grants are used to buy or improve assets.
Clawback
A5.2.1 Public sector organisations providing funds to others to acquire or develop assets
should take steps to make sure that public sector funds are used for the intended
purposes for which the grant is made. It is usual to consider setting conditions on
such grants, taking into account the value of the grant, the use of the asset to be
funded and its future value.A standard grant condition is clawback. This is achieved
by setting a condition on the grant that gives the funding body a charge over the
asset so that, if the recipient proposes to sell or change the use of the asset acquired
with the grant, it must:
* consult the funder;
* return the grant to the funder; or
+ yield the proceeds of sale (or a specified proportion) to the funder.
A5.2.3 However, a charge over the asset is not always essential. Some ground rules
are suggested in box A5.2A.
Box A5.2A: when to consider clawback
clawback desirable
* tangible or tangible or intangible assets, including intellectual property rights, crown
copyright, patents, designs and database rights, financed directly, whether wholly or
partly by grants or grants in aid;
* tangible or intangible assets developed by the funded body itself, financed indirectly by
a grant for a related purpose or by grant in aid
clawback not always necessary
136
POL-BSFF-0233694_0139
POL00413475
POL00413475
* procurement of goods and services, where any liability is adequately discharged once
the goods and services have been provided
* — where a grant has been provided for research and not specifically for the creation of
physical asset, the successful conclusion of the research might be adequate return
A5.2.4 Because funders, recipients and circumstances can vary so much, there is no
single model for clawback. Bespoke terms are often desirable. They should allow as
much flexibility as seems sensible. The aim should be to help recipients develop and
provide services over the longer term while securing value for public funds. Drawing
on the ideas in box 7.2, funders should always settle the terms of each grant with its
recipient at the start of the relationship, consistent with its objectives.
Designing clawback conditions
A5.2.5 The design of clawback conditions for a grant should take account of its
circumstances, the underlying policy objective(s) and the funder’s approach to risk.
A checklist of some common factors to consider is in box A5.2B. Using this tailored
approach can mean different organisations take very different approaches to the
same risks.
Box A5.2B: factors to consider in designing clawback terms
* the nature and purpose of the grant
* how the asset will help secure the policy objectives behind the grant
* the expected life of the asset
* the extent to which the recipient is financed out of public funds
* how the asset will be used by the recipient, eg scope for appreciation or generating
profit
* how long the funder should retain an interest in the asset
* whether the asset may be sold, with any restrictions on disposal, eg as to price or
purchaser
* whether there is sense in reassessing after a certain period or on a given trigger
* — whether the terms of clawback should vary according to a factor such as the asset value
(in which case the terms may need to provide for periodic valuations)
* when the policy objectives should be delivered
* the funder’s legal powers and the recipient's legal position (eg as a company or charity)
* any other relevant legal factors
AS5.2.6 In setting terms and conditions for grants, funders should consider what
could happen if things do not proceed as intended, notably what should happen if:
* the recipient does not behave as expected; or
* external conditions are very different to plans; or
* the recipient goes into liquidation (eg should the funder take priority
over unsecured creditors).
137
POL-BSFF-0233694_0140
POL00413475
POL00413475
Duration of charge
A5.2.7 It can make sense to relate the funder’s right to clawback to the policy
objectives of making the grant rather than allowing it to persist indefinitely
unchanged. Some policy options are outlined in box A5.2C. If the clawback is linked
to the value of an asset which is likely to appreciate, there is a risk that the recipient
may face a disincentive to participate, so care and sensitivity may be needed.
AS5.2.8 However, it can also make sense to moderate grants conditions by using
terms such as:
* a break clause allowing the funder and recipient to consider whether
the objectives of the funding have been achieved, triggering the end or
reduction of the funder’s interest in the asset;
* a review clause allowing scope to retain the charge and review the
clawback period if the project has not met the agreed objectives;
* releasing the funder’s interest in the asset (and so permitting its
disposal or use as collateral) at the end of the agreed charge or
clawback period.
Box A5.2C: options for clawback duration or assets as collateral
* — keying it to the objectives of the grant
* relating it to the period over which the intended benefits are to be delivered
* settling clawback rights on a declining scale, eg falling to zero by the end of an agreed
period, or the
asset's useful life, or by when the policy objectives are deemed delivered
* allowing the recipient to use as collateral the difference between the market value of
the asset and the original grant
A5.2.9 It is common to prohibit recipients from using the assets they acquire or
improve using grants as collateral in borrowing transactions. This is because the
public sector funder might be forced to take up the recipient's legal liability to
service debt should it fail. However, if a funder agrees that a recipient may use
assets acquired or developed with grants as collateral, it should consider carefully
what conditions it should apply. Some freedom of this kind may help the recipient
make the transition to viability or independence. For example, a funder might allow
a recipient to retain income generated by using spare capacity in the funded asset.
A5.2.10 But normally it is important for the funder to retain some control over any
use of the funded asset outside the grant conditions. Typically the funder will
require the recipient to obtain the funder’s consent before raising funds on any part
of a funded asset so long as the clawback period continues. Any further conditions
should be proportionate, striking a proper balance between encouraging the
recipient to be self-supporting and allowing the recipient to use public funds for its
own purpose.
Enforcing a claim on a funded asset
A5.2.11 Where appropriate, funders should secure a formal legal charge on funded
assets. This may be particularly important for high risk projects or to prevent the
138
POL-BSFF-0233694_0141
POL00413475
POL00413475
funder becoming exposed to assuming the recipient's debts. It is usual to take a
registered charge on land under the Land Registration Act 2002 and its Rules. If the
recipient is a Companies Act company, it may make sense to secure a registered
charge on the company’s book debts.
A5.2.12 The form and intended duration of any charge should be recorded in the
founding documents charting the relationship between the funder and recipient.
Both parties will need legal advice, eg covering the statutory background) and on
how the charge would be enforceable. Both parties should also keep track of their
outstanding charges. It is good practice to register a land charge, so that it will
automatically be taken into account during any sale process.
A5.2.13 Sometimes a funder may decide not to enforce clawback when a funded
asset is sold, even though the agreed clawback period is still in force. Funders
should take any such decision consciously on its merits, not letting it go by default.
Reasons why a funder might take this approach include:
+ the objectives of the grant may have been achieved;
* the recipient may propose to use the funded asset in an acceptable way
different from the original purpose;
* the recipient may intend to finance an alternative asset or project
within the objectives of the grant scheme out of the proceeds of the
sale;
* the funder might agree to abate future grants to the recipient instead
of taking the proceeds of sale.
A5.2.14 If a department decides to waive a clawback condition, it should consider
whether it needs to report that waiver as a gift. If so, it should follow the gift
reporting requirements in annex 4.12
A5.2.15 If it is proposed to sell a grant recipient with a live charge, the funder
should take legal advice on whether it can enforce the charge on the proceeds of
the sale. The funder should consider the legal position of the proposed purchaser of
the grant recipient, and in particular whether its objectives (eg charitable or as a
social enterprise) are in line with the original grant conditions. If the funder becomes
aware that such a sale is possible at the time the grant is awarded, it would usually
be appropriate to require the recipient to obtain its consent before proceeding. And
any request for endorsement of a sale should be evaluated objectively.
139
POL-BSFF-0233694_0142
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 5.3
Treatment of income and receipts
The rules on use of income and receipts are designed to control the circumstances in which they can
finance use of public resources.
A5.3.1 Parliament controls departments’ use of income and receipts, just as it controls the
raising of tax, since both may finance use of public resources. Departments should
ensure that all income and associated cash is recorded in full and collected
promptly.
A5.3.2 Unless otherwise authorised, cash receipts must be paid into the
Consolidated Fund. Sometimes specific legislation requires this for certain income
streams; for many others the Civil List Act 1952 classifies them as hereditary
revenues to be paid into the Consolidated Fund
A5.3.3 Hereditary revenue is:
* virtually all non-statutory receipts;
* cash receipts received by virtue of specific statutory authority; and
* receipts where statute does not say otherwise.
Unless it can be established that a particular type of receipt or surplus cash is not
hereditary revenue, the default position is that it is, and that the Civil List Act 1952
requires it to be paid into the Consolidated Fund
A5.3.4 The main categories of income and associated receipts are shown in Box
A.5.3A.
Box A5.3A: the different kinds of central government income
* the proceeds of taxation: paid into the Consolidated Fund
* repayment of principal and interest on NLF loans: paid direct to the NLF
140
POL-BSFF-0233694_0143
POL00413475
POL00413475
* sums due under bespoke legislation: paid as specified, eg the proceeds of national
insurance contributions paid into the National Insurance Fund
* receipts of trading funds: treated as specified in the founding legislation
* sums due to departments financed through Estimates:
- either paid into the Consolidated Fund as CFERs
- or applied to support spending in the Estimate if the Treasury agrees.
A5.3.5 Specific legislation, with Treasury approval, is normally required to authorise
use of income directly to meet resource consumption ie to offset current or capital
expenditure. In effect this process means that the department seeks less finance
through Estimates because part of the cost of the service is met from income
Parliament has an interest because otherwise resource consumption would require
specific approval through the Estimates process.
A5.3.6 Following the Clear Line of Sight reforms, there is no longer a specific
control over the amount of income that can be retained by departments and used
to offset spending. However controls over income remain.
A5.3.7 In order for a department to retain income to offset against spending within
the Estimate it must be within the budget boundary (i.e. classed by the Treasury as
negative DEL or departmental AME) and be properly described in the Estimate.
There must also be a direct relationship between the income and the spending and
departments may not use additional income on one part of the Estimate to offset
shortfalls of income (or overspends) in another part of the Estimates without
Treasury approval. Such approval will only be given where the additional income has
an appropriate relationship to the expenditure it is being used to cover.
Authority to retain and use income
A5.3.8 The Treasury has powers to direct that income included in a departmental
Estimate and approved by Parliament may be retained and used by the department
This Treasury direction is included within the introductory text to the Main Supply
Estimates publication’. The direction provides that the income in the relevant
Estimate may be applied against resources (current or capital) within that Estimate
Without such authority the cash must be surrendered to the Consolidated Fund as
extra receipts (CFERs).
A5.3.9 Sometimes departments have excess income, ie income is anticipated to be
higher than the expenditure stream it matches, or more income than was
anticipated in the Estimate. When income is anticipated to be higher than the
expenditure stream it matches departments may present an Estimate with a negative
budgetary limit at the start of the financial year, although this is relatively rare.
When more income is received than was anticipated in the Estimate, departments
are allowed to treat the income as negative DEL as long as it is no more than 10%
above the level envisaged for that year as part of the Spending Review settlement2
Any income in excess of this will normally be treated as non-budget and will need to
be surrendered as a CFER.
1 Gee Estimates Manual httosi//www.gov.ul/government/oublications/supply-estimates-guidance- manual
2 https: .gov.uk/government/collections/consolidated-budgeting-quidance
141
POL-BSFF-023:
3694_0144
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 5.4
Contingent liabilities
Parliament expects advance notice of any commitments to future use of public funds for which there
is no active request for resources through Estimates. This annex discusses how a number of different
kinds of liability should be dealt with.
A5.4.1 As with expenditure, ministers may enter into liabilities — in effect, commitments to
future expenditure — without explicit parliamentary authority. But parliament expects
to be notified of the existence of these commitments when they are undertaken.
Should they eventually give rise to the need for public expenditure, they will require
the authority of an Appropriation Act and frequently also specific enabling
legislation
A5.4.2 Because the Crown is indivisible, ministers (and their departments) cannot
give guarantees to each other. They can, however, enter into commitments to
conditional support with the same effect — though this is rare.
A5.4.3 Some liabilities are uncertain. These contingent liabilities recognise that
future expenditure may arise if certain conditions are met or certain events happen.
That is, the risk of a call on Exchequer funds in the future will depend on whether or
not certain events occur. In taking on such liabilities departments must be sure to
consult the Treasury.
A5.4.4 Arm’s length bodies (ALBs) sponsored by departments do not generally have
powers to take on liabilities, because these would in effect bind their sponsoring
departments. So the documentation governing the relationship between a
department and an ALB (see chapter 7 and annex 7.4) should require the ALB to
gain the sponsor department's agreement to any commitment, including
borrowing, into which it proposes to enter. Departments should ensure that ALBs
have systems to appraise and manage liabilities to the standards in this annex, so
that they can report to parliament any liabilities assumed by ALBs in the same way
as they would their own.
Need for statutory powers
AS5.4.5 It is good practice to enter into liabilities on the strength of specific statutory
powers — as with items of expenditure. This is essential if a regular scheme of loan
guarantees or other support is intended. Departments should consult the Treasury
about proposals for such legislation, which should include arrangements for
reporting new liabilities to parliament. It is usual to put a statement to both Houses
when statutory liabilities are undertaken. Provision in budgets and Estimates should
142
POL-BSFF-0233694_0145
POL00413475
POL00413475
be scored as the department's best assessment of the need to pay out in support of
the liabilities.
A5.4.6 In the nature of giving liabilities, many will arise with little notice
Departments should report these to parliament at the earliest opportunity. There is a
standard procedure for doing this: see paragraphs A.5.5.22 to A.5.5.36 of this
annex.
A5.4.7 If a liability taken on in this way seems likely to persist, the department
concerned should consider backing it with statutory cover. This is because any
expenditure which arises because of it is subject to the same parliamentary
expectations about statutory powers as any other expenditure (see section 2.1). If a
contingent liability could give rise to a loan, the organisation should ensure that
there is reasonable likelihood of the loan being serviced and repaid (see section 5.6).
A5.4.8 There is an exception to the need for statutory powers for accepting
liabilities. Commitments taken on in the normal course of business do not need
specific cover, just as routine administrative expenditure does not (see para 2.3.2).
The standard conditions for treating liabilities as undertaken in the normal course of
business are set out in box A.5.4A, with some common examples. What may be the
normal course of business for one department may not be the normal course of
business for another.
Box A5.4A: Liabilities arising in the normal course of business
In order to treat a liability as arising in the normal course of business, the organisation concerned
should be able to show that:
* the activity is an unavoidable part of its business and/or
* parliament could reasonably be assumed to have accepted that such liabilities can
rest on the sole authority of the Supply and Appropriation Act, based on the
activities it has previously authorised.
Examples of common liabilities arising in the normal course of business include:
* liabilities arising in the course of the purchase or supply of goods and services in the
discharge of the department's business
* contractual commitments to make payments in future years arising under long-term
contracts, eg major building works
* commitments to pay grants in future years under a statutory grant scheme
* contingent liabilities resulting from non-insurance (see annex 4.4)
A5.4.9 If procurement in the normal course of business gives rise to proposals for
liabilities outside the normal range (eg a cap on the contractor's liabilities), the
public sector organisation should consider renegotiating. The acid test is whether
two private sector bodies would use the same terms. In cases of doubt, the Treasury
should be consulted.
143
POL-BSFF-0233694_0146
A5.4.10 PFI contracts are a special case of procurement and so can cause
departments to take on liabilities. There is no need to notify use of standard PFI
terms to parliament, but any use of non-standard terms should be reported like any
other.
A5.4.11 There are additional conditions for taking on non-standard conditions,
namely:
+ the need must be urgent and unlikely to be repeated; and
* it would be in the national interest to act even though there is no
statutory authority.
Taking on liabilities
A5.4.12 Before accepting any liability, the organisation should appraise the proposal
using the Green Book', to secure value for money, just like a proposal to undertake
any other project. The liability should be designed to restrict exposure to the
minimum, eg by imposing conditions about duration. Other possible features to
limit liabilities might include:
* a commitment fee from the beneficiary (though this does not remove
the need for appraisal of the proposition) and/or
* arrangements to lift the liability if the beneficiary no longer needs it.
A5.4.13 Providing indemnities to contractors or limiting their liability in the event of
their own negligence, or that of a sub-contractor, should only be undertaken
following an assessment of the best value for money option for the exchequer as a
whole. Assessment of VFM should include consideration of the fact that requiring
excessive liability caps, beyond what would be reasonable given the size and scope
of the contract, is likely to result in potential contractors including pricing for
excessive risk or choosing not to bid, thus reducing competition. The extreme case
of unlimited liability should be used very sparingly and only after discussion with the
Commercial Function.
5.4.14 When considering the use of unlimited liability clauses departments should
consider whether the contractor could bear such losses without being rendered
insolvent, resulting in the risk being passed back to the department. The
Outsourcing Playbook gives further advice on identifying when to use liability caps
and how to set the level of those caps and support should be sought from the
Commercial Function. Where the quantum or scope of the cap is a departure from
normal commercial practice, or will give rise to a contingent liability, Treasury
consent should be sought in the usual way for novel contentious and repercussive
spend. For the avoidance of doubt limitations of liability that are prohibited or
unenforceable in UK law, for example death or personal injury caused by negligence,
fraud, or fraudulent misrepresentation or breach of any obligation as to title implied
by section 12 of the Sale of Goods Act 1979 or section 2 of the Supply of Goods
and Services Act 1982, are not permitted
A5.4.15 Subject to the statutory powers of the public sector organisation and its
delegated authorities, it is important for an organisation contemplating assuming a
V https: .gov. uk/government/publications/the-green-book-appraisal-and-evaluation-in-central-governent
144
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0147
new liability to consult the Treasury (or the sponsor department, as the case may be)
before assuming it. Departments’ delegated authorities for incurring liabilities
should include the liabilities of any sponsored bodies.
A5.4.16 HM Treasury approval must be sought for all contingent liabilities that are
novel, contentious or repercussive. In addition, a completed Contingent Liability
approval framework checklist must be submitted to HM Treasury before entering
into a contingent liability with a maximum exposure of £3m or more. This process is
also required for remote contingent liabilities.
Types of liability
A5.4.17 Public sector organisations may take on liabilities by:
+ issuing specific guarantees, usually of loans;
* — writing a letter or statement of comfort; or
* providing indemnities.
A5.4.18 It is important to remember that any of these instruments issued by a
minister may be legally enforceable.
A5.4.19 Guarantees should normally arise using statutory powers. They typically
involve guarantees against non-payment of debts to third parties.
A5.4.20 Letters of comfort, however vague, give rise to moral and sometimes legal
obligations. They should therefore be treated in the same way as any other proposal
for a liability. Great care should be taken with proposals to offer general statements
of awareness of a third party's position, or oral statements with equivalent effect.
Creditors could easily take these to mean more than intended and threats of legal
action could result. Treasury approval is essential
A5.4.21 It is common to give certain kinds of indemnity to members of boards of
central government departments or of NDPBs; or to civil servants involved in legal
proceedings or formal enquiries as a consequence of their employment, perhaps by
acting as a board member of a company. The standard form is set out in box
A.5.4B, in line with the Civil Service Management Code. This cover is comparable to
what is obtainable on the commercial insurance market. So it excludes personal
criminal liability, reckless acts or business done in bad faith
A5.4.22 Liabilities of this kind to individuals do not normally need to be reported to
parliament unless they go beyond the standard form or are particularly large or
risky.
POL00413475
POL00413475
Box A5.4B: standard indemnity for board members
where the board member has acted recklessly.
The government has indicated that an individual board member who has acted honestly and in good
faith will not have to meet out of his or her personal resources any personal civil liability, including
costs, which is incurred in the execution or the purported execution of his or her board functions, save
2 httpsv/mww.gov.ul/government/publications/civil-servants-terms-and-conditionshttps:/www.gov.uk/government/publications/civil-
servants-terms-and-conditions
145
POL-BSFF-0233694_0148
Notifying liabilities to parliament
A5.4.23 The rules for notifying parliament of liabilities are very similar to those for
public expenditure. Generally speaking there is no requirement to inform parliament
about any liability which
* arises in the normal course of business;
* arises under statutory powers (subject to third bullet point of paragraph
A5.4.23); or,
* — would normally require notification (i.e. neither arising in the normal
course of business nor under statutory powers) but is under £300,000
in value.
A5.4.24 There are some exceptions to this general rule. Parliament should be
notified of any liability, even if it meets one or more of the criteria given in
paragraph A5.4.22, which:
* arises as a result of a specific guarantee, indemnity or letter of comfort
where the guarantee is not of a type routinely used in commercial
business dealings;
. is of such a size, relative to the department's total budget, that
parliament should be given notice;
* arises under specific statutory powers which require parliament to be
notified; or,
* is novel, contentious or potentially repercussive
A5.4.25 It is important to note that undertakings in the normal course of business
should be judged against the department's normal business pattern authorised by
parliament. So what may be normal for some departments may not be normal for
others. In cases of doubt it is best to report.
A5.4.26 Non-statutory liabilities which need to be reported to parliament should be
notified by Written Ministerial Statement and accompanying departmental Minute
(see box A5.4C). Treasury approval is required before going ahead. It is sometimes
necessary, with Treasury agreement, to adapt the form of wording, eg if the liability
arises immediately.
A5.4.27 Written Ministerial Statements and departmental Minutes should be laid in
the House of Commons, on the same day, and should briefly outline the nature of
the contingent liability and confirm that a departmental Minute providing full details
has been laid in the House of Commons.
5.4.28 Departmental Minutes should
* use the standard wording for the opening and closing passages, which
has been agreed with the PAC (box A.5.4C);
* describe the amount and expected duration of the proposed liability,
giving an estimate if precision is impossible;
* explain which bodies are expected to benefit, and why;
146
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0149
POL00413475
POL00413475
* — if applicable, explain why the matter is urgent and cannot observe the
normal deadlines (paragraph A5.4.26_);
* explain that authority for any expenditure required under the liability
will be sought through the normal Supply procedure;
* be copied to the chairs of both the PAC and departmental committee.
A5.4.29 The indemnity should not go live until 14 parliamentary sitting days, after
the Minute has been laid. Every effort should be made to ensure that the full
waiting period falls while parliament is in session.
A5.4.30 If an MP objects by letter, Parliamentary Question or Early Day Motion, the
indemnity should not normally go live until the objection has been answered. In the
case of an Early Day Motion, the Member(s) should be given an opportunity to make
direct personal representations to the minister, eg proactively arranging a meeting
with them. The Treasury should be kept in touch with representations made by MPs
and of the outcome.
A5.4.31 If, exceptionally, the guarantee or indemnity would give rise to an actual
liability, the department should consult the Treasury about the wording of the
Minute. The department should discuss the implications for the actual liability on its
budget, Estimate and accounts.
A5.4.32 There is not usually a requirement to notify parliament in instances where a
contingent liability arises due to events outside a department or ALB’s control rather
than through an active policy decision. An example of something that would be
outside a department or ALB’s control would be legal proceedings being brought
against them. Events of this nature should still be disclosed in the entity’s Annual
Report and Accounts in line with the requirements of the Government Financial
Reporting Manual (FReM).
Box A5.4C: standard text for departmental Minutes on liabilities
Opening passage
It is normal practice, when a government department proposes to undertake a contingent liability in
excess of £300,000 for which there is no specific statutory authority, for the Minister concerned to
present a departmental Minute to parliament a giving particulars of the liability created and explaining
the circumstances; and to refrain from incurring the liability until fourteen parliamentary sitting days
after the issue of the Minute, except in cases of special urgency.
The body of the Minute should include:
If the liability is called, provision for any payment will be sought through the normal Supply
procedure.
Closing passage
The Treasury has approved the proposal in principle. If, during the period of fourteen parliamentary
sitting days beginning on the date on which this Minute was laid before parliament, a member
signifies an objection by giving notice of a Parliamentary Question or by otherwise raising the matter
in parliament, final approval to proceed with incurring the liability will be withheld pending an
examination of the objection.
147
POL-BSFF-0233694_0150
Non-standard notification
5.4.33 Sometimes it is not possible to give details of a contingent liability with full
transparency. In such cases the department should write to the chairs of both the
PAC and departmental committee to provide the same details as those outlined in
paragraph A5.4.24, with the same notice period. The letters should explain the need
for confidentiality. Any objection by either chair should be approached in the same
way as MPs’ objections (paragraph A.5.4.27). If departments continue to have
concerns about writing to parliament, in particularly sensitive or confidential cases,
they should seek advice from the Treasury.
A5.4.34 Sometimes departments want to report an urgent contingent liability
providing less than the required 14 days notice. In such cases, the department
should follow the procedure in paragraph A.5.4.24 and explain the need for
urgency, agreeing revised wording to the final standard paragraph with the
Treasury
A5.4.35 Departments may also want to report a contingent liability at short notice,
ie less than 14 days before the end of the session. In such cases the contingent
liability should only go live after lying before parliament during 14 sitting days, ie
some days after the start of the next session. If the proposal is more urgent than this
rule would allow, the department should write to the chairs of the PAC and the
departmental committee, giving the information in paragraph A.5.4.24 and
explaining the need for urgency. As a matter of record, when parliament
reconvenes, a Written Ministerial Statement and departmental Minute should be
laid explaining what has happened, including any liabilities undertaken
A5.4.36 The same procedure as in paragraph A.5.4.29 should be used to report
liabilities during a parliamentary recess. In such cases the notice period should be 14
working days notice, ie excluding weekends and bank holidays.
A5.4.37 Similarly, it is possible that a department might want to undertake a non-
statutory contingent liability when parliament is dissolved. Every effort should be
made to avoid this, since members cease to be MPs on dissolution, and committees
will be reconstituted in the new parliament. If the department nonetheless considers
the proposed liability to be essential, it should consult the Treasury. When
parliament reconvenes a Written Ministerial Statement should be laid explaining
what has happened, including any liabilities undertaken.
Reporting liabilities publicly
5.4.38 Any changes to existing liabilities should be reported in the same way as
they were originally notified to parliament, explaining the reasons for the changes. If
an originally confidential liability (see paragraph A5.4.29) can be reported
transparently, the standard Minute (paragraph A.5.4.24) should be laid.
A5.4.39 Departments should report all outstanding single liabilities, or schemes of
liabilities, in their accounts unless they are confidential. Any which would fall as a
direct charge on the Consolidated Fund should be reported in the Consolidated
Fund accounts. The conventions in the FreM should be used
A5.4.40 Estimates should similarly be noted with amounts of any contingent or
actual liabilities. The figures quoted should be the best assessments possible at the
148
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0151
time of publication. Actual liabilities should appear as provisions. The rubric should
refer back to notification of parliament.
5.4.41 When the conditional features of contingent liabilities are met, it is good
practice to wait until parliament has approved the relevant Estimate before
providing the necessary resources. But if providing support is more urgent,
departments should apply for an advance from the Contingencies Fund (see Annex
2.4 and the Estimates Manual? under the usual conditions). If an advance is
approved, a statement to parliament should explain what is happening, and in
particular how the crystallised liability is to be met.
International agreements
A5.4.42 International treaties, agreements or commercial commitments which mean
the UK incurring specific contingent liabilities should follow the parliamentary
reporting procedures as far as possible whether or not the agreement is covered by
legislation. Even if an international agreement does not require legislation for
ratification, it should nevertheless be laid before parliament, accompanied by an
explanatory memorandum, for 21 sitting days before it is ratified (the Ponsonby
rule).
3 httpsv/mww.gov.uk/government/publications/supply-estimates-guidance-
manualhttos/www.gov.ul/government/oublications/supply-estimates-quidance-manual
149
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0152
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 5.5
Lending
Government departments may borrow from the Estimate or NLF and then on-lend to third parties.
There are some key disciplines required to protect the Exchequer from loss. It is also important to keep
parliament informed, especially about risk exposures.
A5.5.1 The government provides loan finance to public sector organisations through departmental
Estimates and the National Loans Fund (NLF). The broad principles of this annex also apply to
Public Dividend Capital (PDC) and government loan guarantees.
Statutory authority
A5.5.2 The NLF needs specific statutory authority to lend to each of its borrowers, normally
found in the enabling legislation of the borrower. Similarly, departments must normally have
specific statutory authority to make voted loans. Box A5.5A identifies the provisions which
should be specified in the enabling legislation. Departments setting up new powers should
consult their Treasury spending team early in the drafting process. If NLF lending is intended,
they should also consult the Exchequer Funds and Accounts team (EFA) in the Treasury.
Loans from the NLF
A5.5.3 The Treasury is accountable for the management of the NLF. In turn departments
responsible for on-lending are accountable for the specific advances they make. So they should
ensure that the conditions for their loans are satisfied and that repayments of interest and
principal are received on time.
A5.5.4 The NLF cannot lend at a loss’. Interest on NLF loans must therefore be sufficient to cover
the cost of government borrowing, on the same terms and for the same period. This makes sure
that lending is unsubsidised and that no final charge rests on the NLF.
A5.5.5 Because the government's credit rating is better than commercial borrowers’ the NLF can
both borrow and lend at fine rates. NLF lending is not available to commercial entities in the
private sector.
A5.5.6 Similarly, NLF loans can only be made where there is a reasonable expectation that they
will be serviced and repaid on the due dates. Lending departments should consider whether to
take security in order to fully protect the NLF's position. And if a lending department becomes
concerned about the security of any of its loans to third parties, it should discuss them with the
Treasury at an early stage. Departments automatically stand behind all NLF loans to arm’s length
bodies (ALBs) and should agree this with them, formally in writing.is intended, they should also
consult the Treasury's Exchequer Funds and Accounts team (EFA).
1195, NLF Act 1968
150
POL-BSFF-0233694_0153
POL00413475
POL00413475
Box A5.5A: powers in legislation enabling lending
NLF loans voted loans
* the Secretary of State or Minister may * the circumstances in which loans may
lend to relevant bodies; be made;
* the Treasury may issue funds from the * repayment of principal and interest
NLF to the Secretary of State; should be made to the Consolidated
* — the purpose for which loans may be Fund
made; * — conditionality associated with the
loans;
* a borrowing limit, sometimes
including a power to raise this limit by
order within a further absolute ceiling
specified in the primary legislation;
principal repayments collected by * — the terms and conditions to be
departments to be surrendered to the attached to loans and how interest
NLF; rates are to be determined;
* a limit on total lending outstanding;
* (sometimes) a power to raise this limit
by order within a further absolute
ceiling;
* a requirement for interest and
* a requirement to present an annual
account to parliament, prepared by
the sponsor department, of loans
made and repaid
Interest on NLF loans
A5.5.7 Interest on temporary NLF loans of up to 6 months is fixed and repayable with the
principal on maturity.
A5.5.8 Long-term NLF loans may be issued at fixed or variable rates. Fixed rate loans may be
repaid by:
* equal instalments of principal (EIP) throughout the life of the loan, normally twice a
year; or
* equal repayments (ER) comprising varying proportions of interest and principal over
the life of the loan, normally twice a year; or
* exceptionally, interest over the life of the loan with repayment of principal in full at
maturity.
A5.5.9 The length and type of loan should be matched to the type of asset being acquired and
the expected payback period. Variable rate loans can be rolled over at one, three, or six monthly
intervals. Penalty interest may be charged if a payment of interest or principal is not received on
time. EFA can advise on the details of the terms and conditions.
A5.5.10 The Treasury sets all NLF interest rates (including on appropriate rollover dates for
variable rate loans) for the different maturities available in the light of prevailing interest rates.
Interest rates for long-term loans are set out on the website of the Public Works Loan Board?
(PWLB).
2 The PWLB is an NDPB which lends NLF funds to local authorities and others www.pwlb.gov.uk
151
POL-BSFF-0233694_0154
POL00413475
POL00413475
Early repayment of NLF loans
A5.5.11 As the government lends at very competitive rates, it is not usually possible for
borrowers to repay loans early in order to refinance on more advantageous terms. If this were
possible, any savings the borrower might make would be at the expense of the NLF, leaving the
Exchequer as a whole worse off. However, there may be a case for early repayment (other than
for temporary loans) where there are genuinely surplus funds (eg from the sale of assets or
trading activities). Similarly, it may also be possible to refinance existing loans where material,
demonstrable and sustained changes (eg in asset life or technology) make a different maturity
period more appropriate.
A5.5.12 Any proposals for early repayment must be agreed with the Treasury beforehand. If
agreed, the borrower pays:
* interest up to the day before the loan is prematurely repaid; plus
* asum, calculated by the Treasury, equal to the present value of all future
repayments of principal and interest on the original schedule. This sum is designed
to leave the Exchequer no worse off. It may be higher or lower than the total of the
sums due on the loan for the outstanding period under the original schedule. The
difference (ie the discount or premium) then scores as an adjustment to interest in
the accounts.
Write off or repayment of NLF loans by grant
A5.5.13 Departments should consult the Treasury about any proposals for a capital
reconstruction involving repayment or write off of NLF loans. It requires primary legislation to
write off NLF loans. Interest remains payable on debts up to the day before repayment or write
off.
A5.5.14 Capital reconstruction of the debts of an organisation which will remain in the public
sector also requires specific statutory powers. Typically the legislation achieves capital
reconstruction of its assets and liabilities by issuing it with voted grants to repay its NLF debt.
A5.5.15 Change of status and capital reconstruction ahead of privatisation is different. When
the borrower's status changes from public to private sector, it is no longer appropriate for it to
enjoy the fine rates the NLF achieves. So all NLF loans must be repaid. Departments should
agree the approach with the Treasury
Accounting for NLF loans
A5.5.16 Legislation authorising an ALB to borrow from the NLF normally specifies that its
sponsor department should prepare its annual accounts. Sponsor departments should also
account for NLF transactions in their accounts in accordance with the FReM
Voted loans
5.5.17 Like NLF loans, voted loans should only be made where there is a reasonable
expectation of their being properly serviced and repaid. Departments making voted loans should
ensure that the conditions in the enabling legislation are met and that the Estimate provides for
advances of principal. If the legislation leaves the lending department with discretion over terms
and conditions, interest rates should be set to reflect the cost to the government of borrowing.
Otherwise the same disciplines apply to voted loans as to NLF loans (paragraphs A.5.5.3-10).
A5.5.18 Voted loans are technically assets of the Consolidated Fund. So payments of interest
and principal should normally be surrendered to the Consolidated Fund. However if there is
152
POL-BSFF-0233694_0155
POL00413475
POL00413475
related expenditure within the same budget boundary as the receipt, such payments may be
retained if the Treasury agrees.
Repaying early and writing off voted loans
A5.5.19 The Treasury should be consulted about any proposals for the early repayment of voted
loans. The rules applying to early repayment of NLF loans (A.5.5.11) normally apply.
A5.5.20 Treasury approval is required to write off loans of more than £20m. The department
concerned should notify parliament in a Treasury Minute using the standard opening and
closing paragraphs in box A.5.5B. If it is not possible for the Minute to be laid allowing fourteen
days of parliamentary time, the Minute should explain why.
A5.5.21 Should a Member of Parliament object to the write-off, the minister responsible should
give the MP the opportunity to make a personal representation about his or her objections. Only
when this dialogue has been concluded will the Treasury be able to give consent to the write-
off.
AS5.5.22 Treasury agreement is also required for smaller write offs unless specific delegations
have been agreed. Departments writing off loans should follow the procedure in annex 4.10 to
notify parliament.
Box A5.5B: Treasury Minute on loan write-offs: standard paragraphs
Opening paragraph:
When a government department proposes to write off the repayment of an Exchequer loan whose
principal outstanding exceeds £20 million, it is the normal practice for the Treasury to present to the
House of Commons a Minute explaining the circumstances and giving particulars of the write-off.
Except in cases of special urgency, Treasury consent is withheld until fourteen parliamentary sitting
days after the issue of the Minute.
Closing paragraph:
The Treasury has approved the proposal in principle. If, during the period of fourteen parliamentary
sitting days beginning on the date on which this Minute was laid before the House of Commons, a
Member signifies an objection (for example by giving notice of a Parliamentary Question or of a
Motion relating to the Minute), final Treasury approval of the remission will be withheld pending an
examination of the objection.
Lending to competitive organisations
A5.5.23 The requirements described above always apply to NLF and voted loans. Some
additional disciplines apply to loans to public sector organisations which operate in commercial
markets. These disciplines are justified by the need to:
* avoid distorting competition in the markets in which these organisations operate;
+ deliver vfm for the Exchequer as a whole by maximising the efficiency of the pooled
borrowing approach and minimising subsequent cost of funds.
A5.5.24 The competitive organisations and transactions in the public sector to which these
disciplines apply are:
* those organisations that compete with the private sector for more than 75% of
their business;
* many organisations that compete for between 20% and 75% of their business,
considered case by case;
153
POL-BSFF-0233694_0156
POL00413475
POL00413475
* usually organisations using loan finance for a particular discrete activity that would
compete with the private sector.
A5.5.25 The disciplines required are all intended to ensure that the public sector organisations
concerned do not exploit any competitive advantage they might otherwise enjoy through access
to cheaper finance. They are set out in box A5.5C
Box A5.5C: Disciplines for commercial lending
* All borrowing must be agreed with the Treasury spending team.
* — The borrower, or its sponsor department, should obtain a credit rating, using
independent financial advice and excluding any implicit or explicit government
guarantees.
* — Any guarantee of an organisation's borrowing should rest on explicit statutory powers.
There may be terms and conditions, eg a cap on the amount.
* — The borrower organisation should satisfy the Treasury that the proposed transactions
are justified within its corporate plan; or for large singleton transaction that it delivers
value for money.
* Short term finance ie less than seven days, should be obtained from commercial
providers, eg through overdrafts
* Longer term borrowing, whether from the NLF or through voted loans, should be at
interest rates comparable to what similar competitor firms in the private sector would
pay, and must as a minimum cover the government's cost of borrowing . The Treasury
will determine the interest rate to be applied.
External borrowing and government guarantees
A5.5.26 Public sector organisations sometimes undertake limited, short-term borrowing from
the private sector, for example through a bank overdraft, in order to meet very short term
requirements not available through public sector lenders. Such borrowing should be explicitly
guaranteed by the government to secure the finest terms unless there are good policy reasons
otherwise
A5.5.27 Guarantees should normally only be given with an explicit statutory power, which
should specify:
* the circumstances in which guarantees may be given and the terms and conditions
to be attached;
* a limit on the total sum which may be covered by guarantees at any one time,
which may include power to raise the limit by order within a further absolute ceiling
specified in the primary legislation;
* arequirement for parliament to be notified once the guarantee has been given; and
* authority for any costs resulting from the guarantee to be met from Estimates.
A5.5.28 Even if the enabling legislation does not require the sponsor department to notify
parliament of new guarantees, the department should follow the standard procedure for
notifying parliament of contingent liabilities (annex 5.4)
A5.5.29 In principle government guarantees may also be given for longer term borrowing,
including in foreign currencies. Such guarantees will only be considered where the guaranteed
borrowing is on terms at least as fine as the government could obtain in its own name. This is a
154
POL-BSFF-0233694_0157
POL00413475
POL00413475
stringent test. Private sector borrowers cannot often meet it. Departments should therefore
ensure that all their sponsored bodies consult them in advance about the terms of any proposed
private sector or overseas borrowing. In no circumstances should any central government
organisation borrow on terms more costly than those available to the government without
Treasury approval.
A5.5.30 As foreign borrowing may also have implications for the credit standing on the
international money markets of the UK public sector, proposals for such borrowing must be
cleared with the Treasury in advance. This applies to all ALBs.
A5.5.31 It is good practice to keep parliament informed when guarantees are first used, or
varied significantly.
155
POL-BSFF-0233694_0158
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 5.6
Banking and managing cash
Public sector organisations should run their cash management processes to provide good value for
the Exchequer as a whole. This means using the Government Banking Service, limiting use of
commercial banking (with Treasury consent in each instance), and providing the Treasury with
accurate forecasts of cashflows. Any use of non-standard techniques should be kept within defined
bounds and controlled carefully.
A5.6.1 Together public sector organisations process large volumes of cash each day in order
to carry out their functions. It is important that the cashflows involved achieve good
value for the Exchequer as a whole by minimising the government's borrowing at
the end of each working day. So as much as possible of the government's cashflow
should be contained within the Exchequer pyramid.
A5.6.2 Public sector organisations must maximise the use of publicly procured
banking services (accounts with commercial banks managed centrally by
Government Banking), unless there is a clear business case to do otherwise. This
ensures effective aggregate control and provides the opportunity for central
consolidation of cash resources to minimise government's financing arrangements.
Other arrangements lead to increased government borrowing increasing costs and
credit risk to the Exchequer.
A5.6.3 When assessing the government's cash position, the Debt Management
Office (DMO) relies in part on the Treasury's cash flow forecasts, which in turn rely
on department's own forecasts. For this reason, it is important for departments and
their ALBs to provide accurate cash flow forecasts to the Treasury.
A5.6.4 Accounting officers are responsible for managing the risks inherent in this
process actively, including any credit exposures of funds held in commercial banks
outside the Exchequer pyramid. Each public sector organisation should establish a
banking policy in order to carry out this task.
Cash management
5.6.5 Good cash management means having the right amount of cash available
when needed, without inefficient unused surpluses. Each public sector organisation
should plan its own cash management efficiently, following the guidelines in box
AS.6A. It is usually convenient for sponsor departments to include their ALBs’ flows
with their own for this purpose. With this information Exchequer Funds and
Accounts (EFA) in the Treasury can enable departments to draw cash as they need it
within their voted provisions in Estimates.
156
POL-BSFF-0233694_0159
POL00413475
POL00413475
A5.6.6 EFA need to understand the dynamics of public sector organisations’
demands for cash and similarly the income they may generate. With this information
they can identify peaks and troughs in the public sector's overall need for cash so
that the DMO can plan its debt management activity. For this purpose EFA need to
know the annual, monthly and daily sequences of cash flow, including any major
one-off items.
A5.6.7 As a matter of good financial management, public sector organisations
should never go overdrawn. Exchequer costs rise if unplanned large payments are
not forecast in advance. The Treasury will normally charge penalty interest at current
base rate plus 2% on overdrawn positions on Government Banking accounts.
Particular care should be given to ensure the nominated supply estimate account
and the account group as a whole remain in credit.
A5.6.8 The Treasury may waive or vary such a penalty interest charge, normally if the
circumstances which led to the overdraft are outside the department's control, or if
the overdraft does not incur additional costs to the Exchequer.
Box A5.6A: planning cash management
* Forecast cash flows and provide EFA with detail within agreed timescales.’
* Tell EFA of the major cash flows even if a definite transaction date has not been agreed
* Keep EFA advised if payment or receipt dates are moved even if this is outside normal
deadlines
* Negotiate payment dates, put them in contracts with counterparties and stick to them
* Transact substantive payments (above £5m) by 12pm (noon) each weekday.
* Negotiate the main inflows to take place on specific dates, and specify receipt in the
morning as late receipts (after 3pm) may not be swept into the Exchequer pyramid that
day.
* Departments should keep commercial accounts at minimum levels and ensure they are
not funded in advance of need. Departments should notify EFA each quarter of any
balances held in a commercial account.
Banking
A5.6.9 Each public sector organisation should establish a banking policy for control
of its working balances and its transmission of funds. Its centrepiece should be use
of Government Banking accounra, which sit within the Exchequer pyramid.
Departments should only hold funds outside of the Exchequer where a good
business case can be made for doing so, e.g. if Government Banking cannot provide
a necessary service or legislation requires it.
A5.6.10 Specific Treasury agreement to each commercial account is required before
it is established. Once this approval has been received, departments (and their ALBs)
should gain the Crown Commercial Representative for Banking’s (CR) approval
before setting up, or altering, any commercial accounts The CR has responsibility for
1 Treasury can financially penalise poor forecasting and reward good forecasting. Further details on the cashflow management
scheme is available from the Treasury EFA team, at cashmant
157
POL-BSFF-0233694_0160
POL00413475
POL00413475
the strategic management of banking services and their suppliers across the whole
of the Exchequer.
A5.6.11 A banking policy should cover at least the features outlined in box A5.6B.
Once settled, the policy should be reviewed regularly to make sure that it remains
appropriate and up to date.
Box A5.6B: an organisation's banking policy
* The Government Banking bank accounts to be operated, with reference to their
purposes (e.g. to contain income from different sources).
* — Any commercial accounts, how they should operate, and why they are justified.
* How and where working overnight balances required for day to day operation are to be
held.
* How the risks of fraud and overpayments are to be prevented, countered systemically
and managed when discovered.
* How any non-Exchequer funds should be managed and kept separate from public
money.
* The organisation’s cut off times for processing payments (in line with the Exchequer’s
core banking hours; authorising payments on their banking platforms by 12pm for high
value payments and no later than 3pm for others).
* When and how payment by cheque, credit card or direct debit is acceptable (see
guidelines in Box A5.6D).
* — Any use of non- standard financial instruments, e.g. agreeing foreign exchange hedging
contracts with commercial banks (see paragraph A5.6.22).
* — Record keeping, including frequent bank statement reconciliations.
A5.6.12 Where a public sector organisation plans to use commercial bank
account(s), it should follow the guidelines in box A5.6C. Only commercial banks
which are members of the relevant UK clearing bodies should be considered for this
purpose’.
Box A5.6C: guidelines for using commercial bank accounts
* — Only hold funds outside of the Exchequer where there is a clear basis to do so (legal,
value for money for the Exchequer as a whole) and with the agreement of the Treasury
* — Consult the CR to agree the approach to negotiations with potential suppliers and to
ensure leverage of government's relationship with key banking suppliers.
* — Ensure that cleared funds will reach accounts as early as possible in the relevant clearing
cycle.
2 httpy/Awww.accesstopaymentsystems.co.uk/introduction-payment-systems/what-payment-scheme
158
POL-BSFF-0233694_0161
POL00413475
POL00413475
* Obtain specific charges for money transmission and other services so that costs are
transparent and comparable.
* Obtain gross interest on cleared credit balances, at rates as close as possible to the Bank
of England's interbank rate or better (subject to credit risk and other liquidity
considerations).
* Refuse arrangements that involve maintaining minimum balances as this increases
Exchequer debt and raises Exchequer costs, even if the offer appears superficially
attractive because of reduced charges.
* Negotiate with care any indemnities that commercial banks may seek to replace their
normal arrangements (e.g. to protect the bank from incorrect BACS debits), after taking
legal advice and obtaining clearance from the Treasury.
* Surrender interest receipts as Consolidated Fund Extra Receipts.
* Minimise balances in commercial accounts without going overdrawn, holding only
enough for immediate needs.
Money transmission
A5.6.13 Public sector organisations should generally use the cheapest, safest and
quickest means of moving public funds, depending on the context. Generally this
means adopting the hierarchy in box A.5.6D. Sometimes it is necessary to strike a
balance among these desirable features to achieve the best outcome.
A5.6.14 For payments to counterparties outside the Exchequer, it is good practice
for public sector organisations to use BACS3 Grade 3 (Government Grade) where
possible. This is a safe and cost effective payment method, allowing for settlement
directly at the Bank of England which reduces exposure to commercial banks. Use of
a government grade Bacs SUN means public sector organisations are not limited to
the standards BACS payment limit. For inward payments, it may be appropriate to
apply credit controls or other safeguards
A5.6.15 Public sector organisations should ensure their finance operations provide
timely payment of all intra-day outflows. Payments made late during the working
day increase intraday volatility, causing disruption to payee’s and the wider
Exchequer’s cash management activities which may lead to increased cost.
Box A5.6D: Money transmission services ranked in order of preference
1 Internal transfers. Use to move funds between accounts held within the same bank as
they are free. You can move funds between your organisation’s accounts as well as to
accounts held by other public sector organisations who use Government Banking’s
contract with the same bank.
2 Government BACS grade 3. This can be used for payments external to the Exchequer
boundary, for example to suppliers and for salaries, and when moving funds to public
sector organisations who use different commercial banking service providers.
3. Faster payments and CHAPS. These should only be used for transactions with entities
external to the Exchequer. Where used for:
3 BACS (formerly the Bankers’ Automated Clearing Service) is the commonly used three-day electronic payments and receiots system
159
POL-BSFF-0233694_0162
POL00413475
POL00413475
* making payments, this should be in a controlled manner with appropriate
safeguards to prevent damage to the Exchequer; or,
* receipts, arrangements should be made for the payer to make payments as early
as possible in the day.
Credit and other payment cards. When accepting credit and other payment cards to
receive payments the fees and additional risks involved need to be understood. Paying
and receiving funds in this way needs to represent value for money for the Exchequer.
5 Payable orders and cheques, should be used by exception and only when other
methods are not available.
should not usually be used
6 Cash, uncrossed cheques, order books or any methods carrying similar security risks
Borrowing
A5.6.16 Public sector organisations should not normally rely on obtaining finance by
borrowing from commercial banks as it is almost always more expensive than relying
on the government's credit rating. Any expenditure financed by such borrowing
without explicit Treasury consent would be considered irregular.
A5.6.17 Certain arm’s length bodies, such as public corporations, trading funds and
NHS Foundation Trusts may, however, borrow from commercial banks for short
term needs. This is only possible if it has been agreed in the founding
documentation for the body (see chapter 7).
Exotic transactions
A5.6.18 Sometimes public sector organisations face financial risks which they find
uncomfortable. In these circumstances they may consider hedging using commercial
financial instruments. Speculation is never acceptable.
5.6.19 In principle risks of this kind are no different to the other risks with which
public sector organisations grapple. They should be managed in a similar way,
balancing the scale and likelihood of the risk against the cost of purchasing
protection or taking other mitigating action.
5.6.20 When considering use of financial instruments, it is important to remember
that:
* their use may entail taking on new risks, which themselves must be
managed. It is therefore necessary for any organisation using them to
ensure that it has sufficient expertise in depth for this task;
* those selling financial instruments do so for profit so their customers
should be confident that the risk avoided is worth the additional cost
they incur. As with insurance (see annex 4.4), the cost of this sort of
protection is not always worthwhile;
* provisions for their use should be contained in the organisation’s
banking policy (box A5.6B)
160
POL-BSFF-0233694_0163
POL00413475
POL00413475
A5.6.21 Any decision to use financial instruments is automatically novel and
contentious and should be cleared with the Treasury accordingly. The Treasury will
normally be sceptical because, like insurance, financial hedging incurs costs in
circumstances where the government may in principle be able to bear the risks and
could usually do so more cheaply. It is also important to bear in mind that there are
some risks that only the government can bear, and that these may be impossible to
hedge at tolerable cost
A5.6.22 If an organisation considers using financial instruments to hedge, its
accounting officer will need to be satisfied that the cost and management effort of
operating the hedging policy offers value for money. The organisation should clear
its strategy with the Treasury and draw up a bespoke section of its banking policy
for the purpose. An outline is shown at box A5.6E
Box A5.6E: Outline management policy for using financial instruments
* Define the risks to be controlled, their volume, frequency and the rationale for control
* Governance of and accountability for the various elements of the organisation's
hedging policy, both at working level and on the board.
* List of acceptable counterparties (after assessing their credit risks and competence), with
exposure limits (which may differ for different financial instruments).
+ Arrangements for defining acceptable risk, differentiated as necessary among the
different methods of dealing with them.
* — Arrangements for monitoring and reporting exposures and forecasts.
Foreign exchange
A5.6.23 The most powerful case for hedging arises when a public sector
organisation must make regular and predictable transactions in foreign currencies
whose scale is material to the organisation’s business. The standard advice about
operating a forex hedging strategy is set out in box A5.6F. When drawing up the
strategy It is important to remember that:
e the costs of hedging are certain though the benefits are not;
commercial advisers on hedging often have an interest in selling relatively
complicated instruments when simpler approaches might suffice.
Box A5.6F: standard practice for managing risk relating to foreign exchange
* Foreign Currency balances: should be minimised.
* Spot trades: use the Bank of England for transactions above £2m (approaching
Government Banking in the first instance)
* Forward transactions: use the Bank of England (again approaching Government
Banking in the first instance), unless specific Treasury agreement is given to do
otherwise
* Options: better avoided since they usually involve a measure of speculation.
* — Currencies: plan to use sterling, US dollars or Euros where possible as markets in other
currencies are less liquid.
161
POL-BSFF-0233694_0164
POL00413475
POL00413475
Exposures: avoid taking long term positions which are usually expensive.
Value for money: the essential test for all strategies.
Foreign exchange hedging: as with financial instruments, must be cleared with the
Treasury.
162
POL-BSFF-0233694_0165
Annex 6.1
How to calculate charges
POL00413475
POL00413475
This annex discusses how to calculate the cost of public services for which a fee is charged.
Introducing a new or updated charge bearing service
A6.1.1 Public sector organisations planning to set up or update a service for which a
fee may be charged should ensure early engagement with Treasury. Advice should
be sought at the earliest opportunity if there are any variations on the standard
model. Proposed variations may be agreed in certain instances, considering each on
its merits. Each will need to be justified in the public interest and on value for money
grounds.
A6.1.2 Practical issues which organisations will need to consider when setting up or
refreshing a charge bearing service include: the definition of the service and its
rationale; the proposed financial objective (for instance, full cost recovery; 70% of
full cost plus a 30% public subsidy); how the service is to be delivered and which
organisation is to deliver it; whether the provider should retain any income from
charges; the proposed charging structure (for instance, a single service or several
sub-services). Organisations will also need to refer to the checklist in box 4.9 of
factors to consider when planning policies and projects.
Measuring the full cost of a service
A6.1.3 With agreed exceptions, fees for services should generally be charged at cost,
sometimes with an explicit additional element to match the returns of commercial
competitors. So to set fees for public services it is essential to calculate the cost of
providing them accurately.
A6.1.4 The main features to be taken into account in measuring the annual cost of
a service are set out in box A6.1A. Not everything in the list will apply to every
service and the list may not be exhaustive. It is important that the calculation is
comprehensive, including all relevant overheads and non-cash items.
A6.1.5 So far as possible the calculation should use actual costs, where they are
known. For services just starting, there may be no alternative to using best
estimates, geared to estimated consumption patterns.
A6.1.6 Start up costs which are capitalised in the accounts and the cost of fixed
capital items are scored in the accounts in full. These costs should be attributed to
the cost of the service as the depreciated value each year.
A6.1.7 Start up costs which cannot be capitalised in the accounts are scored as they
are incurred. Such costs may be recovered through fees and charges by spreading
POL-BSFF-0233694_0166
POL00413475
POL00413475
them over the first few years of service provision. It is also good practice to set fees
to recover costs which cannot be capitalised in the accounts and which have been
incurred to improve efficiency and effectiveness so that charges are lower or offer
better value. This needs explicit Treasury agreement and may require statutory
backing
A6.1.8 For services which are charged at different rates, the same procedure should
be used to set the different rates. That is, the cost of any premium service should be
objectively justifiable by its additional cost (eg where faster shipping is offered); or
conversely any discount should be justifiable by saving to the supplier (eg using the
internet rather than over the counter). Note, however, that sometimes the
legislation permits differential pricing unrelated to the relative underlying costs —
though even then there should be good policy reason for the difference.
Box A6.1A: elements to cost in measuring fees
* Accommodation, including capital charges for freehold properties
¢ Fixtures and fittings
* Maintenance, including cleaning
+ Utilities
* Office equipment, including it systems
+ Postage, printing, telecommunications
* Total employment costs of those providing the service, including training
* Overheads, eg (shares of) payroll, audit, top management costs, legal services, etc
* Raw materials and stocks
* Research and development
* Depreciation of start up and one-off capital items
* — Taxes: vat, council tax, stamp duty, etc
* — Capital charges
* Notional or actual insurance premiums
* Fees to sub-contractors
* Distribution costs, including transport
* — Advertising
* Bad debts
* Compliance and monitoring! costs
* Provisions
but not
* Externalities imposed on society (eg costs from pollution and crime)
* — Costs of policy work (other than policy on the executive delivery of the service)
* Enforcement costs!
* — Replacement costs of items notionally insured
1 See the HM Treasury publication on receipts
httosi//assets. oublishing.service.gov.ul/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/226421/PU1548 final.odf
POL-BSFF-0233694_0167
POL00413475
POL00413475
* Start up costs (those which are capitalised in the accounts) and one-off capital items
Financial objectives
A6.1.9 The standard approach to setting charges for public services (including
services supplied by one public sector organisation to another) is full cost recovery. It
normally means recovering the standard cost of capital, currently 3.5% in real terms.
Some exceptions are noted in section 6.4.
A6.1.10 One other exception is commercial services, ie those services which
compete or may compete with private sector suppliers of similar services. These
should aim to recover full costs including a real rate of return in line with the rates
achieved by comparable businesses facing a similar level of risk. The normal range of
rates is 5-10% but rates as high as 15% may be appropriate for the very highest risk
businesses
A6.1.11 Great care should be taken in pricing commercial services where public
sector suppliers have a natural dominant position. The market prices of competitors
will often be a good guide to the appropriate rate of return if there is genuine
competition in the market. Where there are limited numbers of buyers and sellers in
a market, it may be better to take other factors into account as well. These might
include past performance, the degree of risk in the underlying activity and issues
bearing on future performance.
Accidental surpluses and deficits
A6.1.12 Despite every effort to measure and forecast costs, surpluses and deficits
are bound to arise from time to time. Causes may include variations in demand, in
year cost changes, and so on. It is good practice to consider mid-year adjustment to
fee levels if this is feasible.
A6.1.13 It is also good practice to set fees to recover accumulated past deficits. This
may require statutory backing through a s102 order (see paragraph 6.3.3).
POL-BSFF-0233694_0168
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 6.2
Charging for information
This annex discusses how public sector organisations should charge for the use and re-use of
information, including data, text, images or sound recordings. Much information about public
services is available for free. However, when charging for information, it is generally at full cost
although there are exceptions.
A6.2.1 The policy is that much information about public services should be made available
either free or at low cost, in the public interest. Most public organisations freely post
information about their activities and services on the internet. There should be no
additional charge for material made available to meet the needs of particular groups
of people e.g. Braille or other language versions. More extensive paper or digital
versions of information may carry a charge to cover the costs of production.
A6.2.2 Information products have an unusual combination of properties: typically,
high cost of production combined with low cost or reproduction. They are
frequently licensed for the use of many customers simultaneously rather than being
sold or otherwise transferred. This can make for complex charging arrangements to
recover costs accurately.
A6.2.3 It is good practice to make available sufficient recent legislation, public policy
announcements, consultation documents and supporting material to understand
the business of each public sector organisation.
A6.2.4 Anything originating in Crown bodies, including many public sector
organisations, has the protection of Crown copyright. Most Crown copyright
information is made available at no charge under Open Government Licence terms.
A6.2.5 Public sector organisations should maintain information asset registers as
part of their asset management strategy’.
Rights to access
A6.2.6 The terms on which information is made available should be made clear at
the point of sale or licensing. There is a clear public interest in maximising access to
much public sector material, and this should be borne in mind when deciding what
charges should be levied. For this reason many publications can be re-used by others
1 For further information see httpy/www.nationalarchives. gov. uk/information-management/manage-information/policy-
process/digital-continuity/step-by-step-guidance/steo-2/
170
POL-BSFF-0233694_0169
free of charge. However, public sector organisations should take account of
copyright issues, using legal advice as necessary
A6.2.7 Most public sector organisations choose, as a matter of policy, to make
available on the internet information disclosed in response to requests under the
Freedom of Information Act 2000 and Environment Information Regulations 2004
Public sector bodies should also note the provisions of the amendments (introduced
by the Protection of Freedoms Act 2012) to sections 11-11B and 19 of the Freedom
of Information Act 2000? in respect of relevant datasets, where there are statutory
duties relating to the format and supply of requested datasets and to their listing in
publication schemes, and to charges under a specified licence.
Information carrying charges
A6.2.8 Whilst the majority of information is free to access, a number of public
sector organisations supply information for which charges are made to cover the
associated costs. These include:
* services commissioned in response to particular requests;
* services where there are statutory powers to charge;
* information sold or licensed by trading funds (although they must
comply with the rules set out by the re-use regulations — see below);
* publications processing publicly gathered data for the convenience of
the public, through editing, reclassification or other analysis;
* retrieval software, e.g. published as a key to using compiled data
A6.2.9 Public sector organisations can also charge for supplying some information
which recipients intend to process, e.g. for publication in another format. Licences
supplied in this way may take a number of forms, including royalties on each
additional copy sold in the case of the most commercial applications. The norm is:
* Raw data: license and charge at marginal cost;
* Value added data and information supplied by trading funds: charge at
full cost including an appropriate rate of return where this is permitted
under the re-use regulations (see paragraph A6.2.10)
een of Public Sector Information Regulations
A6.2.10 The Re-use of Public Sector Information Regulations 20153 set out the
circumstances where public sector bodies may charge above marginal cost for
licensing the re-use of information. Where it is intended to charge for the re-use of
information within the scope of the regulations, it is important to comply with those
regulations, paying attention to the clauses that cover requirements to generate
revenue.
2 Freedom of Information Act 2000 revised - https://mww.legislation.gov.ul/ukpga/2000/36/contents
3 SI 2015/1415 - htto://www.legislation.gov.uk/uksi/2015/1415/contents/made
171
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0170
POL00413475
POL00413475
A6.2.11 Trading funds, for example, may charge for information where the
customer intends to duplicate or process (re-use) such material for profit. In such
cases, Crown bodies need to apply for a delegation of authority from the Keeper of
Public Records¢ to license the information.
A6.2.12 The regulations set out that “charges for re-use must, so far as is
reasonably practicable, be calculated in accordance with the accounting principles
applicable to the public sector body”. See Annex 6.3 for further detail on marginal
cost pricing.
4 httpv/www.nationalarchives.gov.uW/information-management/re-using-public-sector-information/uk-government-licensing-
framework/crown-copyright/delegations-of-authority/
172
POL-BSFF-0233694_0171
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 6.3
Competition law
Public sector organisations need to take care if they provide services which compete with private
sector suppliers of similar services, or may do so. It is important that they respect the requirements of
competition law.
A6.3.1 UK competition law is founded on the Competition Act 1998 which prohibits
business agreements that prevent, restrict or distort competition in trade in the UK.
They also disallow market abuse on the part of any business in a dominant! in a
market.
A6.3.2 In particular, the following kinds of unfair competition are not allowed:
* very high prices that may exploit market power;
* very low prices that may exclude competitors;
+ differential prices (or other terms and conditions of service) for the
same product to different customers (except for objective reasons such
as differences in quality or quantity) that distort competition; or
* refusing to supply competitors without objective justification such as
poor customer credit worthiness.
Pricing in competitive markets
A6.3.3 Services should be costed in line with the normal rules for full cost recovery.
Charges should be set to achieve the appropriate financial objective, normally at
least recovering full costs.
A6.3.4 Some public sector organisations both supply data for use in providing
public services and sell services using their data in competition with commercial
firms. Such organisations need to take particular care not to abuse their competitive
position in the market, especially if it is dominant. This could happen if a dominant
supplier organisation allocated its costs in such a way that an efficient competitor
could not operate profitably.
A6.3.5 There can be circumstances which merit departing from the normal principle
of full cost recovery. The justification is normally to achieve greater efficiency and
sensitivity in responding to patterns of demand or cost, e.g.:
1 A business is deemed to be in a dominant position if it can generally behave independently of competitive pressures in its field
173
POL-BSFF-0233694_0172
if the service cannot be expanded, but customers are willing to pay
more, there may be a case for increasing the price;
if there is excess capacity and customers are not willing to pay the
current charge, there may be a case for reducing the charge or
reducing output;
incentive charging, i.e. charging below cost to encourage demand, or
above cost to discourage it.
A6.3.6 If a public sector organisation decides not to recover full costs for a while, it
should take care that:
its prices are not reduced in such a way as to stifle competition (a rapid
cut in prices could be unfair to private sector competitors);
its products and services are not charged at less than their average
variable costs or short run marginal costs (though this does not
preclude charging at less than break even for a short period, e.g. to
match competition);
the charging strategy is compatible with full cost recovery over the
medium term. This may mean ceasing to offer a service which has
become unviable against the competition;
any cross subsidies between services should not drive prices below
average variable cost or short run marginal cost;
if, exceptionally, a supplier charges below full cost because it has
surplus capacity, there must be broader benefits and prices should not
fall below average variable or short run marginal cost.
Delivering financial objectives
A6.3.7 Public sector organisations should normally plan to achieve their financial
objectives. If necessary this may mean adjusting prices or managing the cost
structure of the supply to deliver adequate efficiency. In particular, if a public sector
supplier forecasts a deficit, it should take remedial action promptly.
A6.3.8 If a public sector supplier moves away from full cost charging, there may be
a case for reviewing its financial objective. Normally any such change needs the
agreement of both the responsible minister and the Treasury
Taking things further
A6.3.9 The following may be particularly useful:
the Competition Act and public bodies at
http://webarchive.nationalarchives.gov.uk/20140402142426/http://ww
w.oft.gov.uk/OFTwork/publications/publication-
categories/guidance/competition-act/
agreements and concerted practices at
http://webarchive.nationalarchives.gov.uk/20140402142426/http://ww
w.oft.gov.uk/shared_oft/business_leaflets/ca98_mini_quides/oft443.pdf
174
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0173
POL00413475
POL00413475
* abuse of a dominant position
https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_d
ata/file/284422/oft402.pdf .
A6.3.10 More generally, it is good practice for bodies supplying goods or services
into competitive markets to seek legal advice on the application of competition law
at an early stage.
175
POL-BSFF-0233694_0174
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 7.1
Forming and reforming ALBs
This annex covers the processes of setting up new arm’s length bodies and reshaping existing ones,
either by merger, dissolution or other transformation. While the processes are flexible, there are some
common themes centring on accountability and streamlining government processes.
Rationale for ALBs
A7.1.1 The government works through ALBs when there is a good reason to do so, usually
when it is helpful for a specialist body to carry out a function where independence is
important. Each ALB has its own bespoke reason for existing and many are
established under specific legislation determining their form, functions and powers.
A7.1.2 The three main kinds of ALBs are agencies, non departmental public bodies
(NDPBs) and non-ministerial departments (NMDs). Each has its strengths and is
appropriate for a range of functions. The three are compared in box A7.1A.
Setting up a new ALB
A7.1.3 It is good practice to decide early which kind of body is most appropriate
when setting up a new ALB (sources of guidance on setting up ALBs are in box
A7.1B). Parliament is concerned that hiving off functions into an ALB should not
diminish accountability. For that reason NMDs are rarely the right solution.
A7.1.4 It is important to remember that effective functional independence does not
necessarily require a specific structure. Ministers can choose to stand back from the
decisions made or opinions published by any ALB while maintaining financial control
and oversight, eg ministers never interfere with HMRC’s decisions on individual
taxpayers’ affairs
A7.1.5 The next step is to develop a memorandum of understanding (or equivalent)
setting out the relationship between the new ALB and its parent department. Advice
on this is in annex 7.2. These should be periodically reviewed to keep abreast of
experience and the changing context'.
A7.1.6 Decisions on the form of any particular ALB must ultimately be for ministers.
They will depend in part on perceptions of the function in question, and on the
extent to which ministers think it right to take a day to day interest in its affairs.
Generally, the closer the ALB’s functions are to the centre of government, the more
likely it is to be an agency; while NMD status is appropriate for organisations of
1 See the Cabinet Office Guidance on Reviews of Non Departmental Public Bodies which is available on the Cabinet Office website
http: civilservice. gov. uk/wo-content/uoloads/201 1/09/triennial-reviews-quidance-2011_tem6-38900.odf
176
POL-BSFF-0233694_0175
POL00413475
POL00413475
some size carrying out professional functions. The form and structure of the NDPB is
very flexible, suiting specific and technical functions.
A7.1.7 When an ALB is planned, it is essential to consult both the Treasury and the
Cabinet Office about its powers, status and funding2. Departments should also
seek advice from UK Government Investments (UKGI), the government's centre of
excellence in corporate finance and corporate governance, when establishing
central government companies, public corporations or ALB’s which have a
significant commercial element, significant private sector interface and/or whose
governance is of material complexity. In the case of such organisations,
departments should also consider whether UKGI is best placed to deliver the
shareholder function itself on behalf of the department or, if not, seek the advice
and use the expertise of UKGI during the life of such arm’s length bodies.
Box A7.1A: comparison of the three main kinds of ALB in central government
Feature agency non-departmental non-ministerial
public body (NDPB) department (NMD)
Status Part of a department Independent Department in its own
organisation. May bea__right
company and/ or
a charity
Crown body Yes Not usually Yes
Established by Administrative action Usually bespoke Administrative action,
(usually quick and primary legislation often supplemented
easy) (may take time). by primary legislation
(if needed, may take
time)
Governance CEO supported bya Independent board led Permanent Secretary
board by non-executive Chair supported by a board
Ministerial A minister in the A minister in the Rarely needed, but
accountability parent department sponsor department when necessary, @
makes key decisions decides key matters, minister in the parent
on the agency's affairs eg whether to adjust department decides
functions, whether to
wind up or replace
Parent department Has direct control Subject to formally Remote
agreed memorandum,
may be light touch
Funding Estimates and/or fee Grant(s) from Estimates and/or fee
income department(s), and / income
or income from fees or
levies
2 See for example: Executive Agencies: A guide for Departments and Public Bodies: A Guide for Deoartments -
httos: gov.ul/aovernment/uoloads/system/uploads/attachment_ data/file/80076/exec agencies guidance oct06_O.odf
177
POL-BSFF-0233694_0176
POL00413475
POL00413475
Employees Civil servants Not usually civil Civil servants
servants
Accounts etc Publishes plans and Publishes own plans Publishes own plans
accounts as part of and accounts; also and accounts
parent department's consolidated into
central accounts sponsor department's
accounts
Parliamentary CEO is Agency CEO is normally the Permanent Secretary is
Accounting Officer, Accounting Officer, Accounting Officer,
oversight by oversight by sponsor department's
departmental PAO departmental PAO PAO could step in if
required
A7.1.8 It is worth remembering that the three kinds of ALB in box A7.1A are only
the most common. Others are possible. Cabinet Office guidance on the categories
of Public Bodies? explains in more detail. They include public corporations and
various kinds of cooperative arrangements with the private or voluntary sector, some
fairly loose. And there is scope to establish one-off arrangements for special bodies
where circumstances demand something different. Special structures must of course
be evaluated carefully, on the strength of a comparative business case, to make sure
that they will deliver value for money to the public purse.
A7.1.9 Whatever the legal status of an ALB, its sponsor department should have a
mechanism for asserting an appropriate degree of control over it, especially in
financial matters and in relation to issues of ethics in the use of public funds. In
general, the greater the extent of public funding, the greater the degree of control
called for.¢
A7.1.10 If legislation is required to set up an ALB, it is important to observe the new
services rules (Section 2.6). Strictly this means that royal assent is required before
resources can be committed to getting the organisation on its feet. In some urgent
cases it may be possible to make a claim on the Reserve to make an earlier start, but
even so only after second reading in the Commons to an uncontroversial bill and
with safeguards to allow commitments to be unwound if the bill does not pass.
A7.1.11 Whatever the approach taken to setting up the new organisation, it is often
desirable to operate a period of shadow running before it starts in earnest. And do
be aware that the process of preparation can take time — eg often a couple of years
or more for an NDPB
Box A7.1B: sources of guidance
Guide to the Establishment and Operation of Trading Funds
http://webarchive. nationalarchives.gov.uk/20130129110402/http:/www.hm-
treasury.gov.uk/psr_reporting_centralgovernment.htm
3 Categories of Public Bodies: A Guide for Departments and is available on the Cabinet Office website
httos: gov.ul/government/uoloads/system/usloads/attachment._datayfile/80075/Categories_of public bodies Dec12.odt
4 For further guidance in relation to this please consult the Cabinet Office Public Bodies Governance Team and UKGI
guidance. httos:/Awww_ukgi.org.uk/wp-content/uploads/2020/03/UK-Government-Arms-Length-Bodies-A-View-from-
Practitioners-January-2020 WEB.odf
178
POL-BSFF-0233694_0177
POL00413475
POL00413475
Making and Managing Public Appointments
http://publicappointmentscommissioner.independent.gov.uk/publications/quidance/
Corporate Governance in Central Government Departments: Code of Good Practice includes
references to NDPBs and Agencies
https:/Awww.gov.uk/government/publications/corporate-governance-code-for-central-government-
departments
Financial Reporting Manual — includes guidance for NDPBs and Agencies, including form of Annual
Reports
https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/government-financial-reporting-manual
Consolidated Budgeting Guidance — includes guidance in relation to NDPBs and public corporations
https:/Avww.gov.uk/government/publications/consolidated-budgeting-quidance
Reforming ALBs
A7.1.12 Valuable as they can be, proliferation of ALBs is not good practice. It adds
to administrative costs generally and can fragment accountability. So it can be
necessary or desirable to wind up or merge ALBs in the light of experience.
A7.1.13 The process of decision making is similar to that for setting up a new ALB if
there is to be a successor organisation. It is good practice to decide on a suitable
shape for the new organisation and then plan legislation, if necessary, to achieve it.
A7.1.14 The predecessor organisation(s) must be wound up in an orderly fashion,
with final accounts to close its affairs (including a comprehensive list of assets and
liabilities). If a closing organisation has no staff by the time the final accounts are
draw up, it is usual for the accounting officer of the successor organisation, if there
is one, to take responsibility for signing them off. If this is not possible, for example
if there is no successor, the PAO of the parent department should sign them off.
A7.1.15 When staff are to be migrated into a new organisation, it is important to
respect their statutory employment rights. Planning for this should form a key part
of the transition preparations, Mistakes can be costly.
179
POL-BSFF-0233694_0178
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 7.2
Framework documents
Departments need arrangements to monitor and understand their arms-length bodies’ strategy,
performance and delivery. These should be set out in a framework document. This annex sets out the
process and clearances required, with links to specimen documents tailored to the nature of various
public sector organisations. Whilst details will be tailored to individual circumstances, the expectation
is that framework documents should follow the appropriate template as closely as practicable, and
departures from the specimen templates should be clearly signposted, explained and justified, and
those departures cleared with HMT spending teams.
A7.2.1 This annex provides guidance on the framework documents for:
. non-departmental public bodies (NDPBs),
. executive agencies;
. statutory office holders;
. central government companies (including those
classified as NDPBs);
. non-Ministerial Departments; and
. public corporations.
A7.2.2 Terminology may differ and it may be these documents are referred to as
a memorandum of understanding, management agreements or
partnership agreements in some cases depending on historical or
departmental practice. The content of documents should, however,
follow the specimen framework document templates. The process set out
below applies irrespective of the name of the document.
180
POL-BSFF-0233694_0179
A7.2.3
A7.2.4
A725
A7.2.6
A7.2.7
The framework document sets out the ALBs purpose, describes the
governance and accountability framework that applies between the roles
of the body and its sponsor Department (and with any other departments
with an interest in the ALB’s business), reflecting the specific structures,
roles and responsibilities in each case, and sets out how the day-to-day
relationship works in practice, including in relation to governance and
financial matters. They are public documents and should be published
online and deposited in the Libraries of both Houses of Parliament in line
with Parliamentary Guidance!
Specimen framework documents for each of the six broad types of ALB as
set out above are published alongside Managing Public Money on gov.uk
and will be updated from time to time. These templates are broadly
similar representing consistent standards of accountability and
governance, with relatively few differences where needed to reflect the
circumstances of a type of body (e.g. where an NDPB is also established
under the Companies Act).
When considering the appropriate specimen template to use the
classification of the body should be considered. This should first be the
formal statistical classification by the Office of National Statistics followed
by classification by the Cabinet Office. Where the body has not been
classified or there is uncertainty as to classification, please consult the
Treasury as to the appropriate template to use. It is important that the
FDs are fit for the purpose of the individual body. It may, therefore, be
appropriate for teams to consider using a different template to that
prescribed by classification if the individual circumstances of the body
mean that another of the templates would be more appropriate, in whole
or part, from an operational or policy perspective (e.g. it may be
appropriate for an NDPB with a Board responsible for complex
commercial operations to use the Government Companies template.)
Where departments are of the view that departures from the specimen
templates are necessary or there is a policy reason why an alternative
template from the bodies statistical classification should be used these
departure should be clearly signposted, and policy arguments explained
and justified. Such departures will also require HMT consent.
New framework documents must be cleared first with the Sponsor
department Corporate Governance Team or Financial Governance Team
or equivalent, before clearance with relevant HMT spending team and the
Treasury Officer of Accounts. It may also be appropriate to share the
framework documents for new public bodies or where there are complex
governance arrangements with the Cabinet Office Public Bodies
Governance Team for their views.
Departments should also seek advice from UK Government Investments
1 https:/www.parliament.uk/globalassets/documents/commons-library/deposited-papers-guidelines-for-depart ments pdf
181
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0180
A7.2.8
A7.2.9
A7.2.10
POL00413475
POL00413475
(UKGI), the government's centre of excellence in corporate finance and
corporate governance, when establishing central government companies,
public corporations or ALB’s which have a significant commercial
element, significant private sector interface and/or whose governance is
of material complexity. In the case of such organisations, departments
should also consider whether UKGI is best placed to deliver the
shareholder function itself on behalf of the department or, if not, seek
the advice and use the expertise of UKGI during the life of such arm's
length bodies.
Where a framework document is amended or departs from the cross-
government templates, the changes must be cleared by the Sponsor
department's Corporate Governance Team or Financial Governance Team
or equivalent, before seeking Treasury consent. Framework documents
should be sent to the spending team and to
TOAEnquiries¢ } Treasury will aim to clear framework
documents within 28 days.
Framework documents should be reviewed and updated at least every 3
years unless there are exceptional reasons that render this inappropriate
that have been agreed with HMT and the Principal Accounting Officer of
the sponsor department. Upon review, where there are departures from
the currently published templates or where the existing framework
documents are no longer in compliance with those templates frameworks
documents should be re-cleared via TOA and the spending team. It may
be appropriate to update a framework document sooner if there are
significant changes to the ALB, e.g. reclassification, or the body taking on
additional functions or being subject to a machinery of government
change.
Framework documents constitute a core constitutional document of the
Arm’s Length Body and it is imperative that Accounting Officers, Board
members and senior officials are familiar with them, ensure they are kept
up to date and use them as guide to govern the collaborative relationship
between the Arm's Length Body, the Sponsor Department and the rest of
Government.
182
POL-BSFF-0233694_0181
Annex 7.3
Government Companies, Public
Corporations, and Trading Funds
POL00413475
POL00413475
advice on common issues that arise.
Companies are used across government as a way of delivering on government objectives which
are better met by a more discrete legal entity with a clear accountability and governance
structure. Government companies’ objectives are diverse and as such their characteristics are
equally diverse. The risk of such diversity is that it can lead to inconsistency in spending
controls, governance arrangements and accountability. This annex is intended to consolidate
existing guidance in relation to their responsibilities for public money and to provide some
What is a government company?
7.3.1 A Government Company (often informally referred to as a “GovCo") is one in which
the Government is the majority or only shareholder. It can include situations both
where the government has purposely set up the company up as a GovCo or where
the government has acquired majority shareholder status of an existing company.
7.3.2 Government may also have interests in companies where it does not hold
majority shareholder status. This may be where Government is the sole or majority
customer, where it holds preference shares, where the company is closely governed
by a regulatory regime or where the company is provided [what kind of] support by
the Government such that government is deemed to hold significant control. Given
this diversity, it is helpful to consider companies through more clearly defined criteria
than the high-level label of “GovCo”.
Classification of Government companies — public or private sector?
7.3.3 The initial question for determining what kind of controls and governance apply
is whether the company is formally classified as public or private sector. Most GovCos
will be public sector but government also has interests in private sector companies.
7.3.4 Companies are classified to the public or private sector based on ONS criteria.
The ‘public sector’ is defined by the Office of National Statistics (‘ONS’) with reference
to the European System of Accounts 2010 in accordance with EU requirements for
Governments to produce accurate public sector finances and national accounts. The
National Accounts (or Sectoral) classification of entities as public or private depends
on the level of government control over the general corporate policy of the entity
being classified. This can be direct or indirect and may be evidenced by indicators that
include
183
POL-BSFF-0233694_0182
¢ The ability to appoint those in control, or those who determine the policy of
the entity; and / or
e A right to be consulted over such appointments, or to have a veto over
appointments; and / or
e The provision of funding accompanied by rights of control over how that
funding is spent; and / or
e Ageneral right to control the day-to-day running of the body.:
7.3.5 ONS decisions on classification are definitive and are informed by common
European standards. These classifications are published2. ONS may take some time to
consider the classification of a particular government entity, in the meantime advice
should be sought from the Treasury classifications team. Pending review by the ONS,
the Treasury view of classification should be regarded as definitive and should inform
the body's governance, reporting and accountability structures.
Classification of Government companies — central, local or public
corporation?
7.3.6 Once the ONS has classified a body as public sector it is classified to a sub-sector
based on its characteristics. These sub-sectors in respect of companies are:
¢ Central Government Company (CGC)
e Local Government Company (LGC)
e Public Corporation (PC)
Central and Local Government Companies
7.3.7 Government companies which are classified by the Office of National Statistics
(ONS) for the purposes of National Accounts as ‘central government’ are usually then
administratively classified by Cabinet Office as NDPBs.
7.3.8 CGCs receive income wholly or in the majority from central government via
grants or contracts, or receive the majority of their income by virtue of levies or
taxation or funded by the recovery of their costs through the charging of fees.
7.3.9 Central Government Companies should:
e Be subject to Managing Public Money.
¢ Have an accounting officer appointed by the Principal Accounting Officer of
the sponsor department
e Have clear delegated spending authorities from the department agreed by HM
Treasury and subject to Cabinet Office spending control
I Taken from Classification of Public Bodies Guidance for Departments
https:/assets. publishing. service. gov. ul/government/uploads/systemVuploads/attachment_datayfile/51957 1/Classification-of-
Public_Bodies-Guidance-for-Departments. pdf
2 Public Sector Classification Guide
https:/Awww.ons.gov.uk/methodology/classificationsandstandards/economicstatsticsclassifications/introductiontoeconomicstatistic
sclassifications
184
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0183
¢ Follow government standards in governance, recruitment, procurement and
transparency for NDPBs.
e Appropriate board make-up and the balance of executive and non-executive
functions
¢ Have consolidated financial reporting
7.3.10 It is important to ensure that provisions in the Framework Document for any
government company are consistent with the company’s Articles of Association. If
there are obligations that need to be legally imposed on the company (e.g. matter
reserved for the Shareholder), these need to be included in the Articles (which are
legally binding on the Company).
7.3.11 Local Government Companies are outside the scope of Managing Public
Money.
Public Corporations
7.3.12 Companies established by Government that meet the “market body test” are
classified by the ONS as Public Corporations. The “market body test” requires that the
company derives more than 50 per cent of its production cost from the sale of goods
or services at economically significant prices (that is, prices that have a substantial
influence on the amounts of products that producers are willing to supply and on the
amounts of products that purchasers wish to acquire) for all or most of the goods
and services they produce. Note that classification tests above refer primarily to Non-
Financial Corporations. The classification rules for Financial Corporations are complex
7.3.13 Public Corporations’ powers are usually defined in statute, but otherwise all
the disciplines of corporate legislation apply. Sponsor departments should define any
contractual relationship with a corporate in a Framework Document (or equitant
document), adapted to suit the corporate context while delivering public sector
disciplines. Public Corporations do not have accounting officers and are not subject
to Managing Public Money as a matter of course.
7.3.14 They should instead be subject to levels of control and governance that are
deemed appropriate by the sponsor department and agreed in the context of the
Framework Document and approved by HM Treasury. It may be the nature of the
body is such that it would be appropriate to consider if that a requirement for
compliance with the principles of Managing Public Money should be imposed. This
should be achieved through the exercise of shareholder rights and is not the default
position. If this outcome is sought it may be appropriate to appoint the Chief Executive
as an Accountable person mirroring the role of the Accounting Officer for central
government bodies to ensure the Shareholder expectations in this regard are met.
7.3.15 Public Corporations are subject to Consolidated Budgeting Guidance? and in
in particular are expected to provide a return to government in respect of capital
employed. In the case of PCs performing essentially government-type functions, 3.5%
real will normally be appropriate. A PC competing in the market should typically be
expected to return a higher rate to reflect the prevailing market rate
3 https: .gov.uk/government/collections/consolidated-budgeting-quidance
185
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0184
Trading Funds
7.3.16 Trading Funds are established under the Trading Funds Act 1973. Most trading
funds are public corporations, but some may be central government companies. It is
rare for new trading funds to be created and requires Treasury consent. Unlike Public
Corporations in general trading funds have accounting officers appointed by HM
Treasury and are subject to Managing Public Money by default. In addition,
Departments should have careful regard to Consolidated Budgeting Guidance
particularly regarding expected rates of return from trading funds.
7.3.17 Further guidance may be found in the Treasury's Guide to the Establishment
and Operation of Trading Funds (www.hm-
treasury.gov.uk/mediastore/otherfiles/quideto_tradingfunds.PDF )
Legal Status of Companies
7.3.18 In addition to the classification decisions above, companies can be constituted
either as companies limited by shares or as companies limited by guarantee. When
planning on setting up a government company, officials should discuss with their
legal advisors and with HM Treasury the appropriate legal status for incorporation
7.3.19 A profit-making company will generally be better incorporated by shares and
non-profit by guarantee. A company limited by shares may also be preferable in joint
ventures where there is significant disparity between the capital contributed or the
support provided through income or otherwise. Different levels of share capital can
reflect such variation and further provide flexibility in the levels of control exercised by
shareholders.
7.3.20 Alternate legal structures are also available such as charities, community
interest companies and mutual. The Commercial Models Team in Cabinet Office can
provide support and advice. It is important that the model used follows the policy
objective rather than seeking to force policy objectives to fit a model.
Framework documents
7.3.21 It is important to ensure that provisions in the Framework Document for any
government company are consistent with the company’s Articles of Association. If
there are obligations that need to be legally imposed on the company (e.g. matter
reserved for the Shareholder), these may need to be included in the Articles (which
are legally binding on the Company).
7.3.22 For further guidance in relation to framework documents for government
companies see Annex 7.2 and published specimen templates.
Creation of new companies
7.3.23 Companies are relatively easy to create by government departments through
simple incorporation under existing legislation. However, departments should be wary
of falling foul of the new services rules (see MPM 2.6). This is particularly likely to be
the case if the company is due to perform functions that are not already part of the
department's ambit of activity. Even where the new company performs pre-existing
functions, it may that the new delivery mechanism for that service is such that the
new services rules may be engaged. This should be considered on a case by case basis.
Creating a new company will generally be novel and as such will require HMT consent.
It will also be appropriate to share framework agreements with HMT to set out
186
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0185
proposed governance arrangements. If the new company is likely to be classified as a
central government body consent will also need to be obtained from Cabinet Office
for the creation of a new public body*.
7.3.24 As with the creation of all ALBs, departments should consider the guidance as
set out in Annex 7.1 and in particular the requirements and guidance as set out in
TAT
Audit
7.3.25 Companies in general are required by statute to have their accounts audited.5
It is expected that companies classified as NDPBs will be audited by the Comptroller
and Auditor General.¢ If the company is not for profit and the C&AG is appointed as
Auditor by an order under the Government Resources and Accounts Act then the
company is exempted from the requirement for a Companies Act audit.7 If the C2AG
is appointed as auditor of the company by agreement between the company and
Minister of the Crown or by virtue of statute’ then any Audit must also fulfil the
requirements of a Companies Act audit.
7.3.26 Audit arrangements for Public Corporations, companies not classified as
NDPBs or companies where the auditor is not appointed automatically by statute
should be agreed with HMT. It will generally be good practice for the sponsor
department to seek the views of the NAO as to whether they think it appropriate to
take on the role of auditor. It should be noted that where a body is consolidated into
a department's group accounts all elements of the group will be subject to the
C&AG's opinion on regularity.
4 httos://ww.gov.uk/government/oublications/the-aporovals-orocess-for-the-creation-of-new-arms-length-bodies
5 httpsil/wwww legislation gov.uk/ukpga/2006/46/section/475
6 https://webarchive.nationalarchives. gov.uk/20130102 1931 06/httpy/ww.hm-treasury.gov.uk/d/dao0108,odt
7 hetpsimnw. legislation gov.ulvukpga/2006/46/section/482
8 https: Jegislation.gov.uk/ukoga/1983/44/sectior/6
187
POL00413475
POL00413475
POL-BSFF-0233694_0186
POL00413475
POL00413475
Annex 7.4
Using private finance
Some public services are delivered in partnership with private sector providers, using some carefully
controlled private finance. Because the private sector contractor puts its own funds at risk, it can
incentivise delivery of assets and services to time and cost, and can offer value for money where the
benefits of risk transfer and private sector delivery offset the additional cost of private finance. Such
deals are not appropriate for every project.
A7.4.1 Although the use of private finance in the delivery of public sector assets and
services is one method of procurement, it is not suited to all types. Where it is used
effectively it can offer a number of strengths in delivering public assets (see box
A7.4A). These stem from:
* sharing risk in delivering public projects within a structure in which the
private sector contractor puts its own capital at risk;
* payment to the private sector being structured in such a way as to
ensure the private sector is incentivised to deliver the required services
or obligations under the arrangement; and
+ the private sector being incentivised to grow market share in the joint
delivery of services, or to grow the value in the joint management of
assets.
A7.4.2 Contracts using private finance may include the ongoing maintenance and
operation of the asset and the delivery of associated services to outcome
specifications set by the public sector. Generally they are long term arrangement
between the parties.
Box A7.4A: strengths of using private finance to deliver public sector assets and services
Getting projects built to time and to budget
Improving whole-of-life risk allocation and management, creating disciplines and
incentives on the private sector to manage risk effectively
Securing a greater focus on due diligence
Securing better integration of design, construction and operational skills
Securing a greater focus on growing market share or value of a joint asset or business
A7.4.3 Private finance does not suit every project. It should only be used after the
rigorous scrutiny of all alternative procurement options, where:
188
POL-BSFF-0233694_0187
POL00413475
POL00413475
* the use of private finance offers better value for money for the public
sector compared with other forms of procurement. Annex 4.6 gives
additional guidance on the value for money analysis that is required
alongside the assurance and approval process;
+ the structure of the project allows the public sector to define its needs
after construction as service outputs that can be adequately contracted
for in a way that ensures an effective and accountable delivery of long-
term public services;
* the public sector partner is able to predict the nature and level of its
long term service requirements with a reasonable degree of certainty.
A7.4.4 Conversely, private finance is not usually suitable for:
* individual projects too small to justify the transaction costs; or
* large innovative IT projects, or other services where it is not practical to
specify the requirements sufficiently firmly in advance or over the long
time-frame of the prospective contract life
A7.4.5 The main procurement principles continue to apply when using private
finance. It is important that the output to be achieved is clearly specified rather than
the method to be used in carrying out the contract, so that the supplier can
innovate and manage risk effectively. However, it is sensible to clarify key areas of
design early on, to prevent false starts and later misunderstandings.
A7.4.6 Public sector organisations should not, however, use standard contracts
automatically. They should be intelligent customers, providing incentives to
stimulate enough competition to achieve good value in procurement costs. They
should also be aware that their own reputations may be at risk when privately
financed contracts are carried out. Where contracts include the ongoing
maintenance and operation of assets, public sector organisations need to commit
sufficient resource to effective long term contract management, including
monitoring performance and managing any service variation requirements or other
contract delivery issues over the project life.
A7.4.7 Once a major asset has been constructed, it may be possible for the private
sector partner to refinance the project debt on more favourable terms than achieved
at financial close. The contract should specify how the financial benefit of any
refinancing should be shared with the public sector purchaser. The Treasury has
produced a standard refinancing protocol to achieve this.
189
POL-BSFF-0233694_0188
POL00413475
POL00413475
Name Definition
Accounting officer A person appointed by the Treasury or designated by a department to be
accountable for the operations of an organisation and the preparation of
its accounts. The appointee is the head of a department or other
organisation or the Chief Executive of a non-departmental public body
(NDPB) or other arms-length-body. See chapter 3.
Accounts direction A direction issued setting out the accounts which a body must prepare,
and the form and content of those accounts.
Affirmative resolution A parliamentary procedure exercising control over secondary legislation (ie,
a Statutory Instrument in the form of an order or regulation). Parliament's
positive approval is required before the instrument can take effect.
Annually Managed Spending included in Total Managed Expenditure (TME), which does not
Expenditure, AME fall within Departmental Expenditure Limits (DELs). Expenditure in AME is
generally less predictable and controllable than expenditure in DEL.
Arm's length bodies, ALBs — Central government bodies that carry out discrete functions on behalf of
departments, but which are controlled or owned by them. They include
executive agencies, NDPBs and government-owned companies.
Capital spending Spending on the purchase of assets (including buildings, equipment and
land), above a certain threshold (set by the body concerned), which are
expected to be used for a period of at least one year. Items valued below it
are not counted as capital assets, even where they have a productive life of
more than one year.
Central government bodies Departments and departmental executive agencies, NDPBs, and NHS
health authorities and boards. The Office for National Statistics determines
which bodies are classified to central government.
Chief executive Title for the head of an arm’s length body, normally appointed as
accounting officer.
Civil Service Code A concise statement issued by the Cabinet Office setting out the
framework within which all civil servants work, and the core values and
standards they are expected to hold.
Clawback The concept that where an asset financed by public money is sold, all or
part of the proceeds of the sales should be returned to the Exchequer.
Commercial banks Bodies other than the Government Banking Service which provide banking
services, including private sector banks and building societies.
Committee of Public A committee of the House of Commons which examines the accounting
Accounts for, and the regularity and propriety of, government expenditure. It also
examines the economy, efficiency and effectiveness, and feasibility of
expenditure. Commonly known as the Public Accounts Committee (PAC).
Common law One of the historical sources of law in the United Kingdom. Often used to
distinguish judge-made case-law and longstanding legal principles from
legislation which has been made by parliament.
190
POL-BSFF-0233694_0189
POL00413475
POL00413475
Comptroller and Auditor
General, C&AG
Concordat
Consolidated Fund, CF
Consolidated Fund standing
services
Consolidated Fund extra
receipt (CFER)
Contingencies Fund
Contingent liabilities
Corporate governance
Cost of capital
Data Protection Act
Delegated authority
Depreciation
Derivative
Detective controls
The chief executive of the National Audit Office, appointed by the Crown,
and an Officer of the House of Commons. As Comptroller, the C&AG's
duties are to authorise the issue by the Treasury of public funds from the
Consolidated Fund and the National Loans Fund to government
departments and others: As Auditor General, the C&AG certifies the
accounts of all government departments and some other public bodies,
and carries out value-for-money examinations. See annex 1.1.
A long-standing agreement between the Treasury and the Public Accounts
Committee that continuing functions of government should be defined in
specific statute. See annex 2.3.
The government's current account, operated by the Treasury, through
which most government payments and receipts pass.
Payments for services which Parliament has decided by statute should be
met directly from the Consolidated Fund, rather than financed annually by
voted money.
Income, or related cash, that passes through a department's accounts but
may not be retained by the department and is surrendered to the
Consolidated Fund.
A government fund, controlled by the Treasury, which, subject to certain
criteria, can provide repayable advances to finance urgent expenditure in
anticipation of parliamentary approval of legislation or Estimates, or used
to finance expenditure in advance of receipts. See annex 2.4.
Potential liabilities that are uncertain but recognise that future expenditure
may arise if certain conditions are met or certain events happen.
The system and principles by which organisations are directed and
controlled
The cost to the government of financing investment, ie the rate at which it
borrows. This is included in the calculation when setting fees and charges
and is calculated as a percentage of the net asset value.
Legislation (1998) which governs how organisations can use personal
information which they hold.
A standing authorisation by the Treasury under which a body may commit
resources or incur expenditure from money voted by Parliament without
specific prior approval from the Treasury. Delegated authorities may also
authorise commitments to spend (including the acceptance of contingent
liabilities) and to deal with special transactions (such as write-offs) without
prior approval.
A measure of the wearing out, consumption or other reduction in the
useful life of a fixed asset whether arising from use, passage of time or
obsolescence through technological or market changes.
A financial instrument derived from another, usually sold singly or in
packages to promote hedging, eg, interest rate and exchange rate options.
Controls designed to detect error, fraud, irregularity or inefficiency.
191
POL-BSFF-0233694_0190
POL00413475
POL00413475
Devolved administrations
Discretionary services
Efficiency and Reform
Group
Estimate Manual
Estimates Memorandum
Excess Vote
Exchequer
Exchequer Pyramid
Feasibility
Finance Act
Framework document
Freedom of Information
Full cost
Funding
Generally accepted
accounting practice in the
UK, UK GAAP
Governance Statement
The administrations established in Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland
under the Scotland Act 1998, the Government of Wales Act 1998 and the
Northern Ireland Act 1998.
Services that are not required by statute but are provided, often into
competitive markets.
A part of the Cabinet Office, which works closely with the Treasury to
tackle waste and improve accountability across Whitehall.
A practical reference guide issued by the Treasury which provides detailed
information on the Supply Estimates policy and process.
An explanation of how provision sought in the Estimate is intended to be
used and the relationship with other spending controls. Primarily provided
for the departmental select committee but made freely available online.
The means by which excess expenditure, or otherwise unauthorised
expenditure, of cash, capital or resources, is regularised through an
additional vote by Parliament. See section 5.4.
Central government's central financing arrangements, based on the
Consolidated Fund and National Loans Fund, and managed by the
Treasury and the Bank of England.
A serious of accounts held at the Bank of England through which the
overnight sweep and funding flows.
The principle that proposals with public expenditure implications should be
implemented accurately, sustainable and to the intended timetable.
The legislation through which Parliament agrees the government's tax
decisions. Normally passed in the summer after the spring budget.
A document setting out the accountabilities and relationships of arms-
length-bodies with their sponsor departments — see annex 7.2
Legislation designed to promote public access to a wide range of public
sector data and information (but not personal data).
The total cost of all the resources used in providing a good or service in
any accounting period (usually one year). This includes all direct and
indirect costs of producing the output (cash and non-cash costs) including
a full proportional share of overhead costs and any selling and distribution
costs, insurance, depreciation, and the cost of capital, including any
appropriate adjustment for expected cost increases.
Transferring monies to an account, so that they are available when needed
for payments.
The accounting and disclosure requirements of the Companies Act and
pronouncements by the Financial Reporting Council (principally accounting
standards and Urgent Issues Task Force abstracts), supplemented by
accumulated professional judgements.
An annual statement that accounting officers are required to make as part
of the accounts on a range of risk and control issues.
192
POL-BSFF-0233694_0191
POL00413475
POL00413475
Grant Payments made by departments to outside bodies to reimburse
expenditure on agreed items or functions, and often paid only on statutory
conditions.
Grant in aid Regular payments by departments to outside bodies (usually NDPBs) to
finance their operating expenditure.
Hedging Transaction(s) designed to reduce or eliminate financial risk, eg, because of
interest rate or exchange rate fluctuations.
International Financial International accounting standards reflected in UK GAAP. Adapted by
Reporting Standards (IFRS) government for the public sector.
Irregular expenditure Expenditure outside the ambit of a vote, ie resources spent on matters
outside the ambit of a vote — which were not included in the relevant ambit in the departmental
Estimate and therefore Parliament has not authorised. See section 5.4.
Joined-up government Arrangements under which policy-making and service delivery are
unhindered by departmental boundaries.
Judicial review A procedure by which the courts can review the legality of decisions and
actions of public authorities, including the government. Judicial review
looks at the fairness of the decision-making process rather than the merits
of the decision itself.
Levies Licences to operate public goods, often set to recover associated costs
such as supervision by a regulator.
Misstatement A statement which is untrue. The maker of a misstatement can be sued for
damages by those who have relied on the misstatement, but only if in the
circumstances it was reasonable to rely on it.
National Accounts Accounts produced by the Office for National Statistics in accordance with
the European System of Accounts 1995, which promotes standardisation
in the way in which public sector income and expenditure is measured.
National Audit Office, NAO A corporate Parliamentary body set up to provide resources, support and
constructive challenge to the C&AG. See annex 1.1
National Insurance Fund, A government fund used to meet the cost of contribution-based benefits,
NIF financed mainly by contributions paid by employers and individuals.
National Loans Fund, NLF The fund through which passes most of the government's borrowing
transactions and some domestic transactions.
Non-departmental public A body with a role in the processes of government, but not a government
body, NDPB department or part of one. NDPBs accordingly operate at arm's length
from Ministers.
Notional costs of insurance A cost which is taken into account in setting fees and charges to improve
comparability with private sector service providers. The charge takes
account of the fact that public bodies do not generally pay an insurance
premium to a commercial insurer.
Office for National Statistics, The independent body responsible for collecting and publishing official
ONS statistics about the UK’s society and economy.
Office of the Paymaster Now incorporated within the Government Banking Service, it has statutory
General, OPG responsibilities to hold accounts and make payment for government
departments and other public bodies.
193
POL-BSFF-0233694_0192
POL00413475
POL00413475
Orange book
Overdraft
Parliamentary authority
Prerogative powers
Primary legislation
Propriety
Public Accounts Committee
Public Accounts Commission
Public corporation
Public Dividend Capital, PDC
Public Private partnership,
PPP
Rate of return
Regularity
Restitution
Return on capital employed,
ROCE
Royal charter
The informal title for Management of Risks: Principles and Concepts,
guidance published by the Treasury for public sector bodies.
An account with a negative balance.
Parliament's formal agreement to authorise an activity or expenditure.
Powers exercisable under the Royal Prerogative, ie, powers which are
unique to the Crown, as contrasted with common-law powers which may
be available to the Crown on the same basis as to natural persons.
Acts which have been passed by the Westminster Parliament and, where
they have appropriate powers, the Scottish Parliament and the Northern
Ireland Assembly. Begin as Bills until they have received Royal Assent.
The principle that patterns of resource consumption should meet high
standards of public conduct, and robust governance and respect
Parliament's intentions, conventions and control procedures, including any
laid down by the PAC. See box 2.4.
See Committee of Public Accounts.
A Select Committee of the House of Commons set up under the National
Audit Act 1983 to regulate the National Audit Office.
A trading body controlled by central government, local authority or other
public corporation that has substantial day to day operating
independence. See section 7.7.
Finance provided by government to public sector bodies as an equity stake;
an alternative to loan finance.
A structured arrangement between a public sector and a private sector
organisation to secure an outcome delivering good value for money for
the public sector. It is classified to the public or private sector according to
which has more control
The financial remuneration delivered by a particular project or enterprise,
expressed as a percentage of the net assets employed.
The principle that resource consumption should be compliant with the
relevant legislation and wider legal principles such as subsidy
control and procurement law, delegated authorities and following
the guidance in this document. See box 2.4,
A legal concept which allows money and property to be returned to its
rightful owner. It typically operates where another person can be said to
have been unjustly enriched by receiving such monies.
The ratio of profit to capital employed of an accounting entity during an
identified period, Various measures of profit and of capital employed may
be used in calculating the ratio.
The document setting out the powers and constitution of a corporation
established under prerogative power of the monarch acting on Privy
Council advice.
191
POL-BSFF-0233694_0193
POL00413475
POL00413475
Second reading
Secondary legislation
Section
Select Committee
Service-level agreement
Shareholder Executive
Spending review
Statement of Excesses
Supply
Supply and Appropriation
Acts
Supplementary Estimate
Target rate of return
Trading fund
UK Government Investments,
The second formal time that a House of Parliament may debate a bill,
although in practice the first substantive debate on its content. If
successful, it is deemed to denote parliamentary approval of the principle
of the proposed legislation.
Laws, including orders and regulations, which are made using powers in
primary legislation. Normally used to set out technical and administrative
provision in greater detail than primary legislation, they are subject to a
less intense level of scrutiny in Parliament.
An ‘Estimate line’ within the Part Il: Subhead detail table in an Estimate.
Both Houses of Parliament have select committees that scrutinise the work
and expenditure of government. In the House of Commons, responsibilities
of departmental select committees include oversight of the policies,
administration and spending of particular government departments.
Agreement between parties, setting out in detail the level of service to be
performed. Where agreements are between central government bodies,
they are not legally a contract but have a similar function.
A body created to improve the government's performance as a
shareholder in businesses.
A cross-government review of departmental aims and objectives and
analysis of spending programmes. Results in the allocation of multi-year
budgetary limits.
A formal statement detailing departments’ overspends and irregular
spending as identified by the Comptroller and Auditor General as a result
of undertaking annual audits.
Resources voted by Parliament in response to Estimates, for expenditure by
government departments.
Acts of Parliament, which give formal approval to departmental Supply
Estimates. The Main Estimates are approved by a Supply and
Appropriation (Main Estimates) Act and the Supplementary Estimates by a
Supply and Appropriation (Anticipation and Adjustments) Act.
The means by which departments seek to amend parliamentary authority
provided through Main Estimates by altering the limits on resources,
capital and/or cash or varying the way in which provision is allocated.
Normally presented in February each year.
The rate of return required of a project or enterprise over a given period,
usually at least a year.
Public sector organisation that has a financing framework allowing it to
meet outgoings from commercial revenues. In national accounts they are
normally classified as public corporations.
A company owned by HMT, established in 2016 through the merger of
the Shareholder Executive and UK Financial Investments. Its overarching
governance objective is to promote the organisational performance of the
UK government's ALBs from the perspective of government as owner.
192
POL-BSFF-0233694_0194
POL00413475
POL00413475
Value for money
Virement
Vote
Voted expenditure
Windfall
The process under which organisation's procurement, projects and
processes are systematically evaluated and assessed to provide confidence
about suitability, effectiveness, prudence, quality, value and avoidance of
error and other waste, judged for the Exchequer as a whole.
The use of savings on one or more sections (Estimate lines) or subheads to
meet excesses on another section or subhead within the same voted limit
in an Estimate.
The process by which Parliament approves funds in response to supply
Estimates.
Provision for expenditure that has been authorised by Parliament.
Parliament ‘votes’ authority for public expenditure through the Supply
Estimates process. Most expenditure by central government departments is
authorised in this way.
Monies received by a department which were not anticipated in the
spending review.
193
POL-BSFF-0233694_0195